Motorola Solutions 89FT7067 Portable 2-Way Radio User Manual MOTOTRBO Professional Digital Two Way Radio System

Motorola Solutions, Inc. Portable 2-Way Radio MOTOTRBO Professional Digital Two Way Radio System

Contents

Manual

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIOMOTOTRBO™XPR 755 0/XPR 7580/XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e COLOR DISPLAY PORTABLEUSER GUIDE
ContentsDeclaration of Conformity....................... 15Important Safety Information........17Software Version............................18Computer Software Copyrights....19Handling Precautions.................... 20Getting Started............................... 21How to Use This Guide..................................21What Your Dealer/System AdministratorCan Tell You.............................................21Preparing Your Radio for Use.......23Charging the Battery......................................23Attaching the Battery..................................... 23Attaching the Antenna................................... 24Attaching the Belt Clip................................... 25Attaching the Universal Connector Cover(Dust Cover)............................................. 25Powering Up the Radio..................................27Adjusting the Volume.....................................27Identifying Radio Controls............ 29Radio Controls...............................................29Using the 4–Way Navigation Button..............30Using the Keypad.......................................... 31Non-Connect Plus Operations......33Additional Radio Controlsin Non-Connect PlusMode.................................... 34Contents1English
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................34Programmable Buttons....................... 34Assignable Radio Functions.....35Assignable Settings or UtilityFunctions............................ 38Accessing the ProgrammedFunctions....................................... 38Identifying Status Indicators................39Display Icons............................39Call Icons................................. 42Advanced Menu Icons..............42Mini Notice Icons......................43Sent Item Icons  ....................43Bluetooth Device Icons............ 44Job Tickets Icons..................... 44LED Indicator........................... 44Alert Tones...............................46Indicator Tones........................ 46Switching Between ConventionalAnalog and Digital Mode................46IP Site Connect  ...............................47Capacity Plus  ..................................48Linked Capacity Plus  ...................... 48Making and Receiving Callsin Non-Connect PlusMode.................................... 50Selecting a Zone.................................50Selecting a Channel............................51Receiving and Responding to aRadio Call...................................... 51Receiving and Respondingto a Group Call....................52Receiving and Respondingto a Private Call  .............. 53Receiving an All Call ............... 53Receiving and Respondingto a Selective Call  ........... 54Receiving and Respondingto a Phone Call  ............... 54Making a Radio Call............................56Making a Group Call................ 57Making a Private Call  ...........58Making an All Call ................... 59Making a Selective Call  ....... 59Contents2English
Making a Phone Call withthe One Touch AccessButton..................................60Making a Private Call with aOne Touch Call Button........62Making a Group, Private orAll Call with theProgrammable NumberKey  ..................................63Making a Phone Call withthe ProgrammablePhone Button  .................. 64Making a Call with theProgrammable ManualDial Button  ...................... 66Stopping a Radio Call  .....................68Talkaround..........................................69Monitoring Features............................69Monitoring a Channel...............70Permanent Monitor...................70Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode............ 71Radio Check....................................... 71Sending a Radio Check........... 71Remote Monitor.................................. 72Initiating Remote Monitor......... 73Stopping Remote Monitor........ 74Scan Lists........................................... 75Viewing an Entry in theScan List............................. 75Viewing an Entry in theScan List by Alias Search... 75Editing the Scan List................ 76Scan....................................................80Starting and Stopping Scan..... 80Responding to aTransmission During aScan....................................81Deleting a Nuisance Channel...81Restoring a NuisanceChannel...............................82Vote Scan  ....................................... 82Contact Settings..................................82Making a Group Call fromContacts..............................83Making a Private Call fromContacts  ..........................84Making a Phone Call fromContacts..............................85Contents3English
Making a Call Alias Search.........................................88Making a Group, Private,Phone or All Call by AliasSearch ................................89Assigning an Entry to aProgrammable NumberKey  ..................................90Removing the Associationbetween Entry andProgrammable NumberKey  ..................................91Adding a New Contact............. 92Setting a Default Contact  .....93Call Indicator Settings.........................93Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for Call Alert.........................................93Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for PrivateCalls  ................................94Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for SelectiveCall  ..................................94Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for TextMessage............................. 95Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers forTelemetry Status withText..................................... 96Assigning Ring Styles.............. 97Selecting a Ring Alert Type......97Configuring Vibrate Style......... 98Escalating Alarm ToneVolume................................99Call Log Features................................99Viewing Recent Calls............... 99Storing an Alias from a CallList.................................... 100Deleting a Call from a CallList.................................... 100Viewing Details from a CallList.................................... 101Call Alert Operation...........................101Receiving and Respondingto a Call Alert.................... 101Making a Call Alert from theContact List....................... 102Contents4English
Making a Call Alert with theOne Touch AccessButton................................102Emergency Operation.......................103Receiving an EmergencyAlarm.................................104Responding to anEmergency Alarm............. 104Exiting Emergency ModeAfter Receiving theEmergency Alarm............. 105Sending an EmergencyAlarm.................................105Sending an EmergencyAlarm with Call.................. 106Sending an EmergencyAlarm with Voice toFollow  ........................... 107Reinitiating an EmergencyMode................................. 108Exiting Emergency ModeAfter Sending theEmergency Alarm............. 108Man Down.........................................109Turning the Man DownFeature On or Off..............109Analog Message Encode  ..............110Sending MDC MessageEncode to Dispatcher........110Text Message Features ................... 111Writing and Sending a TextMessage........................... 111Sending a Quick TextMessage with the OneTouch Access Button........ 112Accessing the Drafts Folder...113Managing Fail-to-Send TextMessages..........................115Managing Sent TextMessages..........................117Receiving a Text Message.....120Managing Received TextMessages..........................121Job Tickets........................................125Accessing the Job TicketFolder................................126Logging In and Out of theRemote Server..................126Creating and Sending a JobTicket................................ 127Responding to the Job Ticket.128Deleting a Job Ticket..............128Contents5English
Privacy  ..........................................129Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF). 131Multi-Site Controls  ........................ 131Starting an Automatic SiteSearch...............................131Stopping an Automatic SiteSearch...............................132Starting a Manual SiteSearch...............................133Security.............................................134Radio Disable.........................134Radio Enable..........................135Lone Worker..................................... 137Password Lock Features.................. 138Accessing the Radio fromPassword.......................... 138Unlocking the Radio fromLocked State..................... 139Turning the Password LockOn or Off........................... 139Changing the Password.........140Bluetooth Operation..........................141Turning Bluetooth On andOff..................................... 141Finding and Connecting to aBluetooth Device...............142Finding and Connectingfrom a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode).........143Disconnecting from aBluetooth Device...............143Switching Audio Routebetween Internal RadioSpeaker and BluetoothDevice............................... 144Viewing Device Details...........144Editing Device Name..............144Deleting Device Name........... 145Bluetooth Mic Gain.................145Permanent BluetoothDiscoverable Mode........... 146Notification List..................................146Accessing the NotificationList.................................... 146Auto-Range Transponder System(ARTS)  .....................................147Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP).. 147Wi-Fi Operation.................................148Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........148Connecting to a NetworkAccess Point..................... 148Refreshing the Network List...149Contents6English
Adding a Network...................150Viewing Details of NetworkAccess Points................... 150Removing Network AccessPoints................................ 151Utilities.............................................. 152Locking and Unlocking theKeypad..............................152Turning Keypad Tones Onor Off................................. 152Setting the Squelch Level...... 153Setting the Power Level......... 154Turning the Option BoardFeature(s) On or Off..........154Identifying Cable Type........... 154Turning the Voice OperatingTransmission (VOX)Feature On or Off..............155Setting the Display BacklightTimer.................................156Turning the Backlight AutoOn or Off........................... 157Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off................. 157Setting the Tone AlertVolume Offset Level..........158Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off.................. 158Turning the Power Up AlertTone On or Off.................. 159Setting the Text MessageAlert Tone......................... 160Changing the Display Mode...160Adjusting the DisplayBrightness......................... 161Language............................... 162Turning the LED IndicatorOn or Off........................... 162Turning the IntroductionScreen On or Off...............163Turning the VoiceAnnouncement On or Off.. 163Setting the Text-to-SpeechFeature..............................164Call Forwarding  ..................166Menu Timer............................166Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A)...................................... 167Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)...................................... 167Switching Audio Routebetween Internal RadioContents7English
Speaker and WiredAccessory......................... 168Intelligent Audio......................168Turning the AcousticFeedback SuppressorFeature On or Off  ..........169Turning the MicrophoneDynamic DistortionControl Feature On or Off. 170Setting the Audio Ambience...171Setting the Audio Profiles.......172Turning GPS/GNSS On orOff..................................... 172Text Entry Configuration........ 173Flexible Receive List.............. 179Accessing General RadioInformation........................ 182Front Panel Configuration(FPC)................................ 185Checking the RSSI Values.....186Connect Plus Operations............ 187Additional Radio Controlsin Connect Plus Mode...... 188Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............188Programmable Buttons..................... 188Assignable Radio Functions...189Assignable Settings or UtilityFunctions.......................... 190Identifying Status Indicators inConnect Plus Mode..................... 191Display Icons..........................191Call Icons............................... 193Advanced Menu Icons............193Sent Item Icons ..................... 194Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 194LED Indicator......................... 195Indicator Tones...................... 196Alert Tones.............................196Switching Between Connect Plusand Non-Connect Plus Modes.....196Making and Receiving Callsin Connect Plus Mode...... 197Selecting a Site.................................197Contents8English
Roam Request....................... 197Site Lock On/Off.....................197Site Restriction.......................197Selecting a Zone...............................198Using Multiple Networks................... 199Selecting a Call Type........................199Receiving and Responding to aRadio Call.................................... 199Receiving and Respondingto a Group Call..................200Receiving and Respondingto a Private Call.................200Receiving a Site All Call.........201Receiving an InboundPrivate Phone Call............ 201Receiving an InboundPhone Talkgroup Call....... 202Inbound Phone Multi-GroupCall....................................203Making a Radio Call..........................203Making a Call with theChannel Selector Knob..... 203Making a Private Call with aOne Touch Call Button......206Making a Call with theProgrammable ManualDial Button........................ 206Making an Outbound PrivatePhone Call with theProgrammable ManualDial Button........................ 207Making an Outbound PrivatePhone Call via the PhoneMenu................................. 208Making an Outbound PrivatePhone Call from Contacts. 208Waiting for the ChannelGrant in an OutboundPrivate Phone Call............ 209Making a Buffered Over-Dialin a ConnectedOutbound Private PhoneCall....................................210Making a Live Over-Dial in aConnected OutboundPrivate Phone Call............ 210Advanced Features inConnect Plus Mode.......... 212Auto Fallback.................................... 212Indications of Auto FallbackMode................................. 212Contents9English
Making/Receiving Calls inFallback Mode...................212Returning to NormalOperation.......................... 213Radio Check..................................... 213Sending a Radio Check......... 214Remote Monitor................................ 214Initiating Remote Monitor....... 215Scan..................................................216Starting and Stopping Scan... 216Responding to aTransmission During aScan..................................216User Configurable Scan....................217Turning Scan On or Off.....................217Editing the Scan List......................... 218Add or Delete a Group via the AddMembers Menu............................219Understanding Scan Operation.........221Scan Talkback.................................. 222Contacts Settings..............................222Making a Private Call fromContacts............................223Making a Call Alias Search.... 224Adding a New Contact........... 224Call Indicator Settings.......................225Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for Call Alert .225Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for PrivateCalls.................................. 226Activating and DeactivatingCall Ringers for TextMessage........................... 226Selecting a Ring Alert Type....227Configuring Vibrate Style....... 228Escalating Alarm ToneVolume..............................229Call Log Features..............................229Viewing Recent Calls............. 229Deleting a Call from a CallList.................................... 229Viewing Details from a CallList.................................... 230Call Alert Operation...........................230Receiving and Respondingto a Call Alert.................... 230Making a Call Alert from theContact List....................... 231Making a Call Alert with theOne Touch AccessButton................................232Emergency Operation.......................232Contents10English
Receiving an IncomingEmergency........................234Saving the EmergencyDetails to the Alarm List.... 234Deleting the EmergencyDetails............................... 235Responding to anEmergency Call.................235Responding to anEmergency Alert............... 235Initiating an Emergency Call.. 236Initiating an Emergency Callwith Voice to Follow.......... 236Initiating an Emergency Alert. 237Exiting Emergency Mode....... 237Man Down Alarms.............................238Turning Man Down AlarmsOn and Off........................ 239Resetting the Man DownAlarms...............................241Beacon Feature................................ 242Turning Beacon On and Off... 242Resetting the Beacon.............243Text Message Features.................... 244Writing and Sending a TextMessage........................... 244Sending a Quick TextMessage........................... 245Sending a Quick TextMessage with the OneTouch Access Button........ 246Accessing the Drafts Folder...246Managing Fail-to-Send TextMessages..........................248Managing Sent TextMessages..........................250Receiving a Text Message.....254Reading a Text Message....... 254Managing Received TextMessages..........................254Privacy.............................................. 257Making a Privacy-Enabled(Scrambled) Call............... 259Security.............................................259Radio Disable.........................259Radio Enable..........................260Password Lock Features.................. 262Accessing the Radio fromPassword.......................... 262Turning the Password LockOn or Off........................... 263Unlocking the Radio fromLocked State..................... 263Contents11English
Changing the Password.........264Bluetooth Operation..........................265Turning Bluetooth On andOff..................................... 265Finding and Connecting to aBluetooth Device...............266Finding and Connectingfrom a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode).........267Disconnecting from aBluetooth Device...............267Switching Audio Routebetween Internal RadioSpeaker and BluetoothDevice............................... 268Viewing Device Details...........268Editing Device Name..............268Deleting Device Name........... 269Bluetooth Mic Gain.................269Permanent BluetoothDiscoverable Mode........... 270Notification List..................................270Accessing the NotificationList.................................... 270Wi-Fi Operation.................................271Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........271Connecting to a NetworkAccess Point..................... 271Refreshing the Network List...272Adding a Network...................273Viewing Details of NetworkAccess Points................... 273Removing Network AccessPoints................................ 274Utilities.............................................. 275Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off................. 275Turning Keypad Tones Onor Off................................. 275Setting the Tone AlertVolume Offset Level..........276Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off.................. 277Turning the Power Up AlertTone On or Off.................. 277Setting the Power Level......... 278Changing the Display Mode...278Adjusting the DisplayBrightness......................... 279Setting the Display BacklightTimer.................................280Turning the IntroductionScreen On or Off...............280Contents12English
Locking and Unlocking theKeypad..............................281Language............................... 282Turning the LED IndicatorOn or Off........................... 282Identifying Cable Type........... 283Voice Announcement.............283Menu Timer............................284Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)...................................... 284Intelligent Audio......................285Turning the AcousticFeedback SuppressorFeature On or Off..............286Turning the MicrophoneDynamic DistortionControl Feature On or Off. 287Turning GPS/GNSS On orOff..................................... 287Text Entry Configuration........ 288Accessing General RadioInformation........................ 294Accessories..................................306Authorized AccessoriesList..................................... 307Antennas...........................................307Batteries............................................307Carry Devices................................... 308Chargers........................................... 308Earbuds and Earpieces.....................309Headsets and Headset Accessories.309Remote Speaker Microphones......... 310Surveillance Accessories..................310Miscellaneous Accessories...............311Maritime Radio Use in the VHFFrequency Range...............................312Special Channel Assignments.....................312Emergency Channel......................... 312Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 312Operating Frequency Requirements............312Declaration of Compliance for the Use ofDistress and Safety Frequencies............315Technical Parameters for InterfacingExternal Data Sources............................315Batteries and Chargers Warranty......... 316The Workmanship Warranty........................316Contents13English
The Capacity Warranty................................316Limited Warranty....................................317MOTOROLA COMMUNICATIONPRODUCTS........................................... 317I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSAND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 317II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 318III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................318IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.318V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOTCOVER:..................................................319VI. PATENT AND SOFTWAREPROVISIONS:........................................ 319VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................321Contents14English
Declaration of ConformityThis declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below.Declaration of ConformityPer FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)Responsible PartyName: Motorola Solutions, Inc.Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744Hereby declares that the product:Model Name: XPR 7550/XPR 7580/XPR 7550e/XPR 7580econforms to the following regulations:FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)Declaration of Conformity15English
Class B Digital DeviceAs a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies withIndustry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1This device may not cause harmful interference, and2This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Note:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuantto part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmfulinterference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequencyenergy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interferenceto radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-stallation.If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determinedby turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one ormore of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.Declaration of Conformity16English
Appareil numérique de Classe BEn tant que périphérique d'ordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux stipulations de la partie 15 des rè-glements de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radioexempts de licence. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :1Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférence nuisible.2Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un fonction-nement indésirable.RemarqueCe matériel a fait l'objet de tests et a été déclaré conforme aux limites établies pour un appareil numériquede classe B, comme il est stipulé à la section 15 des règlements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixées afind'offrir une protection suffisante contre des interférences nuisibles dans une installation résidentielle. Cematériel génère, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie radiofréquence et, s'il n'est pas installé ni utilisé confor-mément aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant,on ne peut garantir qu'il n'y aura aucune interférence dans une installation particulière.Si cet appareil cause une interférence nuisible de la réception de la radio ou de la télévision, ce qui peutêtre déterminé en éteignant et en allumant l'appareil, vous êtes encouragé à remédier à la situation enprenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :• Réorienter ou déplacer l'antenne réceptrice.•Augmenter la distance entre l'équipement et le récepteur.• Brancher l'appareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit différent de celui du récepteur.• Consulter un revendeur ou un technicien radio/télévision chevronné pour obtenir de l'aide.Déclaration de conformitéFrançais(Canada)
Important Safety InformationRF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guidefor Portable Two-Way RadiosATTENTION!This radio is restricted to Occupational use only.Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposureand Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-WayRadios which contains important operatinginstructions for safe usage and RF energy awarenessand control for Compliance with applicable standardsand Regulations.For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries,and other accessories, visit the following website:http://www.motorolasolutions.comAny modification to this device, not expresslyauthorized by Motorola, may void the user’s authorityto operate this device.Under Industry Canada regulations, this radiotransmitter may only operate using an antenna of atype and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for thetransmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potentialradio interference to other users, the antenna typeand its gain should be so chosen that the equivalentisotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more thanthat necessary for successful communication.This radio transmitter has been approved by IndustryCanada to operate with Motorola-approved antennawith the maximum permissible gain and requiredantenna impedance for each antenna type indicated.Antenna types not included in this list, having a gaingreater than the maximum gain indicated for thattype, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.Important Safety Information17English
Consignes de sécurité importantesRadios bidirectionnelles portatives : expositionaux radiofréquences et sécurité du produitATTENTION!Cette radio ne doit être utilisée qu'à des finsprofessionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez leguide Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : expositionaux radiofréquences et sécurité du produit, quicontient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnementpour une utilisation sécuritaire et des informations surl'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques, dans lebut d’assurer votre conformité aux normes etrèglements en vigueur.Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste desantennes, des batteries et des autres accessoiresapprouvés par Motorola :http://www.motorolasolutions.comToute modification effectuée à cet appareil sansl'autorisation explicite de Motorola peut annulerl'autorisation d'utiliser cet appareil.Selon la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, cetémetteur radio ne peut être utilisé qu'avec uneantenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal)sont approuvés par Industrie Canada pour cetémetteur. Afin de limiter les interférences radio pourles autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antennedoivent être choisis de façon à ce que la puissanceisotrope rayonnée équivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pasplus forte qu'il ne le faut pour établir lacommunication.Cet émetteur radio a été approuvé par IndustrieCanada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuvéepar Motorola offrant le gain maximal autorisé etl'impédance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqué. Ilest strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil touttype d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste etprésentant un gain supérieur au maximum indiquépour le type.Consignes de sécurité importantesEnglish
Software VersionAll the features described in the following sections aresupported by the software version R02.50.00 or later.See Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersion on page 183 to determine the softwareversion of your radio.Check with your dealer or system administrator formore details of all the features supported.Software Version18English
Version logicielleToutes les fonctions décrites dans les sectionssuivantes sont prises en charge par la versionR02.50.00 ou les versions ultérieures du logiciel de laradio.Consultez la section Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version pour connaître la version logicielle de votre radio.Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements à proposdes fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous àvotre détaillant ou à votre administrateur de système.Version logicielleEnglish
Computer Software CopyrightsThe Motorola products described in this manual mayinclude copyrighted Motorola computer programsstored in semiconductor memories or other media.Laws in the United States and other countriespreserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights forcopyrighted computer programs including, but notlimited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce inany form the copyrighted computer program.Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computerprograms contained in the Motorola productsdescribed in this manual may not be copied,reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, ordistributed in any manner without the express writtenpermission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase ofMotorola products shall not be deemed to grant eitherdirectly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, anylicense under the copyrights, patents or patentapplications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation oflaw in the sale of a product.The AMBE+2™ voice coding Technology embodied inthis product is protected by intellectual property rightsincluding patent rights, copyrights and trade secretsof Digital Voice Systems, Inc.This voice coding Technology is licensed solely foruse within this Communications Equipment. The userof this Technology is explicitly prohibited fromattempting to decompile, reverse engineer, ordisassemble the Object Code, or in any other wayconvert the Object Code into a human-readable form.U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.Computer Software Copyrights19English
Handling PrecautionsThe MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meetsIP57 specifications, allowing the radio to withstandadverse field conditions such as being submersed inwater.• If the radio has been submersed in water, shakethe radio well to remove any water that may betrapped inside the speaker grille and microphoneport. Trapped water could cause decreased audioperformance.• If the radio’s battery contact area has beenexposed to water, clean and dry battery contactson both the radio and the battery before attachingthe battery to the radio. The residual water couldshort-circuit the radio.• If the radio has been submersed in a corrosivesubstance (e.g. saltwater), rinse the radio andbattery in fresh water then dry the radio andbattery.• To clean the exterior surfaces of the radio, use adiluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent andfresh water (i.e. one teaspoon of detergent to onegallon of water).• Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radiochassis below the battery contact. This vent allowsfor pressure equalization in the radio. Doing somay create a leak path into the radio and theradio’s submersibility may be lost.• Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with alabel.• Ensure that no oily substances come in contactwith the vent.• The radio with antenna attached properly isdesigned to be submersible to a maximum depthof 1 meter (3.28 feet) and a maximum submersiontime of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximumlimit or use without antenna may result in damageto the radio.• When cleaning the radio, do not use a highpressure jet spray on the radio as this will exceedthe 1 meter depth pressure and may cause waterto leak into the radio.Caution:Do not disassemble the radio. This coulddamage radio seals and result in leak pathsinto the radio. Radio maintenance should onlybe done in service depot that is equipped totest and replace the seal on the radio.Handling Precautions20English
Getting StartedHow to Use This GuideThis User Guide covers the basic operation of theMOTOTRBO Portables.However, your dealer or system administrator mayhave customized your radio for your specific needs.Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information.Throughout this publication, the icons described nextare used to indicate features supported in either theconventional Analog mode or conventional Digitalmode:Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature.Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature.For features that are available in both conventionalAnalog and Digital modes, no icon is shown.Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are notavailable in Connect Plus mode of operation. See Connect Plus Operations on page 187 for moreinformation.For features that are available in a conventional multi-site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 47 for moreinformation.Selected features are also available on the single-sitetrunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus onpage 48 for more information.Selected features are also available in the multi-sitetrunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See LinkedCapacity Plus on page 48 for more information.What Your Dealer/System Administrator CanTell YouYou can consult your dealer or system administratorabout the following:• Is your radio programmed with any presetconventional channels?• Which buttons have been programmed to accessother features?•What optional accessories may suit your needs?Getting Started21English
• What are the best radio usage practices foreffective communication?• What maintenance procedures will help promotelonger radio life?Getting Started22English
Preparing Your Radio for UseCharging the BatteryFor best performance, your radio is powered by aMotorola-approved Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) orLithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. To avoid damage and toensure compliance with warranty terms, charge thebattery using a Motorola charger exactly as describedin the charger user guide. It is recommended yourradio remains powered off while charging.Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial usefor best performance.Attaching the BatteryNote:If user inadvertently attaches a UL battery toan FM approved radio or vice versa, thecertification on the radio will be voided. Yourradio can be preprogrammed via CPS to alertyou if this battery mismatch occurs. Checkwith your dealer or system administrator todetermine how your radio has beenprogrammed. This battery mismatch alertfeature is only applicable for IMPRES batteryand Non-IMPRES battery with kit numberprogrammed in Erasable Programmable ReadOnly Memory (EPROM).When the radio is attached with the wrongbattery, a low pitched warning tone sounds,the LED lights up blinking red, display showsWrong Battery and the VoiceAnnouncement/Text-to-Speech sounds WrongBattery if the Voice Announcement/Text-to-Speech is loaded via CPS.1Align the battery with the rails on the back of theradio. Press the battery firmly, and slide upwardsuntil the latch snaps into place. Slide battery latchinto lock position.Preparing Your Radio for Use23English
2To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move thebattery latch ( ) into unlock position and hold, andslide the battery down and off the rails.AAttaching the AntennaCaution:If antenna needs to be replaced, ensure thatonly MOTOTRBO antennas are used.Neglecting this will damage your radio.1With the radio turned off, set the antenna in itsreceptacle and turn clockwise.2To remove the antenna, turn the antennacounterclockwise.Preparing Your Radio for Use24English
Attaching the Belt Clip1To attach the belt clip, align the grooves on theclip with those on the battery and press downwarduntil you hear a click.2To remove the belt clip, press the belt clip tabaway from the battery using a key. Then slide theclip upward and away from the radio.Attaching the Universal Connector Cover(Dust Cover)The universal connector ( ) is located on theantenna side of the radio. It is used to connectMOTOTRBO accessories to the radio.AInsert the hooked end of the cover into the slotsabove the universal connector. Press downward onthe cover to seat the lower tab properly into the RFconnector.Turn the thumbscrew clockwise to secure theconnector cover to the radio.Preparing Your Radio for Use25English
To remove the universal connector cover, press downon the cover and turn the thumbscrewcounterclockwise.Replace the dust cover when the universal connectoris not in use.If the radio is exposed to water, dry the universalconnector before attaching an accessory or replacingthe dust cover.If the radio is exposed to salt water or contaminants,perform the following cleaning procedure.1Mix one tablespoon of mild dishwashing detergentwith one gallon of water to produce a 0.5 percentsolution.2Clean only the external surfaces of the radio withthe solution. Apply the solution sparingly with astiff, nonmetallic, short-bristled brush.3Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft and lint-freecloth. Ensure the contact surface of the universalconnector is clean and dry.4Apply Deoxit Gold Cleaner or Lubricant Pen(Manufacturer CAIG Labs, Part number G100P)on the contact surface of the universal connector.5Attach an accessory to the universal connector totest the connectivity.Note:Do not submerge the radio in water. Ensureexcess detergent does not get trapped inbetween the universal connector, controls, orcrevices.Clean the radio once a month for maintenance. For aharsher environment such as in petrochemical plantsor in a high salt density marine environment, cleanthe radio more often.Preparing Your Radio for Use26English
Powering Up the RadioARotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwiseuntil you hear a click. You see MOTOTRBO (TM) on thedisplay of the radio momentarily, followed by awelcome message or welcome image.The LED lights up solid green ( ) and the Homescreen lights up if the backlight setting is set to turnon automatically.A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up testis successful.Note:There is no power up tone if the radio tones/alerts function is disabled (see Turning theRadio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 157).Turn off the radio by rotating this knobcounterclockwise until you hear a click. You see abrief Powering Down on the display of the radio.Adjusting the VolumeIncrease the volume by turning the On/Off/VolumeControl Knob clockwise.Decrease the volume by turning this knobcounterclockwise.Preparing Your Radio for Use27English
Note:Your radio can be programmed to have aminimum volume offset where the volumelevel cannot be lowered past the programmedminimum volume. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator for more information.Preparing Your Radio for Use28English
Identifying Radio ControlsRadio Controls12345678919101817161514131211 1Channel Selector Knob2On/Off/Volume Control Knob3LED Indicator4Side Button 1[1]5Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button6Side Button 2[1]7Side Button 3[1]8Front Button P1[1]9Menu/OK Button10 4-Way Navigation Button11 Keypad12 Back/Home Button13 Front Button P2[1]14 Display15 Microphone16 Speaker17 Universal Connector for Accessories18 Emergency Button[1]19 Antenna1These buttons are programmable.Identifying Radio Controls29English
Using the 4–Way Navigation ButtonYou can use the 4–way navigation button,  , toscroll through options, increase/decrease values, andnavigate vertically.Category Direction or   or Menu Vertical Naviga-tion-Lists Vertical Naviga-tion-View Details Vertical Naviga-tionPrevious/NextItemYou can use the 4–way navigation button,  , asa number, alias, or free form text editor.Editor Catego-ryDirection or   or Number - Left : Delete lastdigitRight : -Alias - -Free Form Text Move cursor up/downMove cursorone characterright/leftNumeric Values Increase/DecreaseMove cursorone characterright/leftIdentifying Radio Controls30English
Using the KeypadYou can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio’s features. You can use the keypad to entersubscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The nexttable shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.Key Number of Times Key is Pressed1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 131 . , ? ! @ & ' % — : * #A B C 2D E F 3G H I 4J K L 5M N O 6P Q R S 7T U V 8Identifying Radio Controls31English
Key Number of Times Key is Pressed1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13W X Y Z 90Note:Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn offthe CAPS lock.* ordel Note:Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.# orspace Note:Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”. Longpress to change text entry method.Identifying Radio Controls32English
Non-Connect Plus OperationsNon-Connect Plus Operations33English
Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus ModePush-To-Talk (PTT) ButtonThe PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) servestwo basic purposes:A• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allowsthe radio to transmit to other radios in the call.Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release thePTT button to listen.The microphone is activated when the PTT buttonis pressed.• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button isused to make a new call (see Making a Radio Callon page 56).If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off on page 158) or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends beforetalking. During a call, if the Channel Free Indication featureis enabled on your radio (programmed by yourdealer), you will hear a short alert tone the momentthe target radio (the radio that is receiving your call)releases the PTT button, indicating the channel isfree for you to respond. You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, ifyour call is interrupted, indicating that you shouldrelease the PTT button, for example when the radioreceives an Emergency Call.Programmable ButtonsYour dealer can program the programmable buttonsas shortcuts to radio functions depending on theduration of a button press:Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode34English
Long press Pressing and holding for theprogrammed duration.Press and hold Keeping the button pressed.Note:The programmed duration of a button press isapplicable for all assignable radio/utilityfunctions or settings. See EmergencyOperation on page 103 for more informationon the programmed duration of theEmergency button.Assignable Radio FunctionsAudio Profiles Allows the user to select thepreferred audio profile.Audio Routing Toggles audio routingbetween internal and externalspeakers.Audio Toggle Toggles audio routingbetween the internal radiospeaker and the speaker ofwired accessory.Bluetooth® AudioSwitchToggles audio routingbetween internal radiospeaker and externalBluetooth-enabled accessory.Call Alert Provides direct access to thecontacts list for you to select acontact to whom a Call Alertcan be sent.Call Forwarding Toggles Call Forwarding on oroff.Call Log Selects the call log list.Contacts Provides direct access to theContacts list.Emergency Depending on theprogramming, initiates orcancels an emergency.Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on oroff.Manual Dial  Depending on theprogramming, initiates aPrivate or Phone Call bykeying in any subscriber ID orphone number.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode35English
Manual SiteRoam[2] Starts the manual site search.Mic AGC On/Off Toggles the internalmicrophone automatic gaincontrol (AGC) on or off.Monitor Monitors a selected channelfor activity.Notifications Provides direct access to theNotifications list.Nuisance ChannelDelete[2]Temporarily removes anunwanted channel, except forthe Selected Channel, fromthe scan list. The SelectedChannel refers to the selectedzone or channel combinationof the user from which scan isinitiated.One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefinedPrivate, Phone or Group Call,a Call Alert or a Quick Textmessage.Option BoardFeatureToggles option boardfeature(s) on or off for optionboard-enabled channels.Permanent Monitor Monitors a selected channelfor all radio traffic until functionis disabled.Phone Provides direct access to thePhone Contacts list.Privacy  Toggles privacy on or off.Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID.Radio Check Determines if a radio is activein a system.Radio Enable Allows a target radio to beremotely enabled.Radio Disable Allows a target radio to beremotely disabled.Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of atarget radio without it givingany indicators.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode36English
Repeater/Talkaround[2]Toggles between using arepeater and communicatingdirectly with another radio.Scan[2] Toggles scan on or off.Site Info Displays current LinkedCapacity Plus site name andID. Plays site announcementvoice messages for thecurrent site (this function isunavailable when VoiceAnnouncement is disabled).Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radiosearches the current site only.When toggled off, the radiosearches other sites inaddition to the current site.Status Selects the status list menu.Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on alocal or remote radio.Text Message Selects the text messagemenu.Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey Stops the transmission of aremote monitored radiowithout giving any indicators,or an ongoing interruptible callto free the channel.Trill EnhancementOn/OffToggles trill enhancement onor off.VoiceAnnouncement forChannelPlays zone and channelannouncement voicemessages for the currentchannel. This function isunavailable when VoiceAnnouncement is disabled.VoiceAnnouncementOn/OffToggles voice announcementon or off.Voice OperatingTransmission(VOX)Toggles VOX on or off.Zone Allows selection from a list ofzones.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode37English
Assignable Settings or Utility FunctionsAll Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts onor off.Backlight Toggles display backlight on oroff.BacklightBrightnessAdjusts the brightness level.Display Mode Toggles the day/night displaymode on or off.Keypad Lock Toggles keypad betweenlocked and unlocked.Power Level Toggles transmit power levelbetween high and low.Accessing the Programmed FunctionsYou can access various radio functions through oneof the following ways:• A short or long press of the relevantprogrammable buttons.• Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:1Press   to access the menu. Press theappropriate Menu Scroll button (  or  ) toaccess the menu functions.2To select a function or enter a sub-menu, pressthe   button.3To go back one menu level, or to return to theprevious screen, press the   button. Longpress the   button to return to the Homescreen.Note:Your radio automatically exits the menuafter a period of inactivity and returns toyour Home screen.2Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity PlusAdditional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode38English
Identifying Status IndicatorsDisplay IconsThe 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,and menu entries.The following are icons that appear on the display ofthe radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar,arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage andare channel specific.Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI)The number of bars displayed repre-sents the radio signal strength. Fourbars indicate the strongest signal. Thisicon is only displayed while receiving.MonitorSelected channel is being monitored.BluetoothThe Bluetooth feature is enabled butthere is no remote Bluetooth device con-nected.Bluetooth ConnectedThe Bluetooth feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a remote Bluetoothdevice is connected.Sign InRadio is signed in to the remote server.Sign OutRadio is signed out of the remote server.High Volume DataRadio is receiving high volume data andchannel is busy.Job Ticket NotificationNotification List has items to review.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode39English
 or  Power LevelRadio is set at Low power or Radio isset at High power.Tones DisableTones are turned off.Option BoardThe Option Board is enabled.Option Board Non-FunctionThe Option Board is disabled.Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-erIndicates time left before automatic re-start of radio.GPS/GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a position fix is avail-able.GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out ofRange The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled butis not receiving data from the satellite.Scan[3][4]Scan feature is enabled.Scan- Priority 1[3][4]Radio detects activity on channel/groupdesignated as Priority 1.Scan- Priority 2[3][4]Radio detects activity on channel/groupdesignated as Priority 2.Vote ScanVote scan feature is enabled.Flexible Receive ListFlexible receive list is enabled.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode40English
EmergencyRadio is in Emergency mode.Secure The Privacy feature is enabled.Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled.Site Roaming[3] The site roaming feature is enabled.Talkaround[3][4]In the absence of a repeater, radio iscurrently configured for direct radio to ra-dio communication.BatteryThe number of bars (0 – 4) shown indi-cates the charge remaining in the bat-tery. Blinks when the battery is low.Wi-Fi Excellent[5]Wi-Fi signal is excellent.Wi-Fi Good[5]Wi-Fi signal is good.Wi-Fi Average[5]Wi-Fi signal is average.Wi-Fi Poor[5]Wi-Fi signal is poor.Wi-Fi Unavailable[5]Wi-Fi signal is unavailable.3Not applicable in Capacity PlusAdditional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode41English
Call IconsThe following icons appear on the radio’s displayduring a call. These icons also appear in the Contactslist to indicate ID type.Private CallIndicates a Private Call in progress. Inthe Contacts list, it indicates a sub-scriber alias (name) or ID (number).Group Call/All CallIndicates a Group Call or All Call inprogress. In the Contacts list, it indi-cates a group alias (name) or ID(number).Phone Call as Private CallIndicates a Phone Call as Private Callin progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-cates a phone alias (name) or ID(number).Phone Call as Group/All CallIndicates a Phone Call as Group/AllCall in progress. In the Contacts list, itindicates a group alias (name) or ID(number).Bluetooth PC CallIndicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates aBluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID(number).Advanced Menu IconsThe following icons appear beside menu items thatoffer a choice between two options or as an indicationthat there is a sub-menu offering two options.4Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus5Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580eAdditional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode42English
Checkbox (Empty)Indicates the option is not selected.Checkbox (Checked)Indicates the option is selected.Solid Black BoxIndicates the option selected for the menuitem with a sub-menu.Mini Notice IconsThe following icons appear momentarily on theradio’s display after an action to perform task istaken.Successful Transmission (Posi-tive)Successful action taken.Failed Transmission (Negative)Failed action taken.Transmission in Progress (Transi-tional)Transmitting. This is seen before indi-cation for Successful Transmission orFailed Transmission.Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner ofthe radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.ORSent SuccessfullyThe text message is sent successfully.ORSend FailedThe text message has not been sent.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode43English
ORIn-Progress• The text message to a group alias or IDis pending transmission.• The text message to a subscriber aliasor ID is pending transmission, followedby waiting for acknowledgement.Bluetooth Device IconsThe following icons also appear next to items in thelist of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicatethe device type.Bluetooth Data DeviceBluetooth-enabled data device, suchas a scanner.Bluetooth Audio DeviceBluetooth-enabled audio device,such as a headset.Bluetooth PTT DeviceBluetooth-enabled PTT device, suchas a PTT-Only Device (POD).Job Tickets IconsAll JobsIndicates all jobs listed.New JobsIndicates new jobs.LED IndicatorThe LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status ofyour radio.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode44English
ABlinkingredBattery mismatch occurs or radio istransmitting at low battery condition,receiving an emergency transmissionor has failed the self-test uponpowering up, or has moved out ofrange if radio is configured with Auto-Range Transponder System.SolidyellowRadio is monitoring a conventionalchannel or in Bluetooth DiscoverableMode.BlinkingyellowRadio is scanning for activity orreceiving a Call Alert, flexible receivelist is enabled or all local LinkedCapacity Plus channels are busy.DoubleblinkingyellowRadio is no longer connected to therepeater while in Capacity Plus orLinked Capacity Plus; all Capacity Plusor Linked Capacity Plus channels arecurrently busy. Auto Roaming isenabled, radio is actively searching fora new site. Also indicates that radiohas yet to respond to a group call alert,or radio is locked.SolidgreenRadio is powering up or transmitting.BlinkinggreenRadio is powering up, receiving a non-privacy-enabled call or data, ordetecting activity, or retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissionsover the air.Doubleblinkinggreen Radio is receiving a privacy-enabledcall or data.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode45English
Note:While in conventional mode, when the LEDblinks green, it indicates the radio detectsactivity over the air. Due to the nature of thedigital protocol, this activity may or may notaffect the radio's programmed channel.For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus,there is no LED indication when the radio isdetecting activity over the air.Alert TonesAlert tones provide you with audible indications of thestatus, or response to data received on the radio.Continuous Tone A monotone sound.Sounds continuously un-til termination.Periodic Tone Sounds periodically de-pending on the durationset by the radio. Tonestarts, stops, and repeatsitself.Repetitive Tone A single tone that re-peats itself until it is ter-minated by the user.Momentary Tone Sounds only once for ashort period of time de-fined by the radio.Indicator TonesHigh pitched tone Low pitched tonePositive Indicator ToneNegative Indicator ToneSwitching Between Conventional Analog andDigital ModeEach channel in your radio can be configured as aconventional analog or conventional digital channel.Use the Channel Selector Knob ( ) to switchbetween an analog or a digital channel.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode46English
AWhen switching from digital to analog mode, certainfeatures are unavailable. Icons for the digital features(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing‘grayed out’. Disabled features are hidden in themenu.Your radio also has features available in both analogand digital mode. However, the minor differences inthe way each feature works does not affect theperformance of your radio.Note:Your radio also switches between digital andanalog modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on page 80).IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventionalcommunication beyond the reach of a single site, byconnecting to different available sites which areconnected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.When the radio moves out of range from one site andinto the range of another, it connects to the new site'srepeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.Depending on your settings, this is doneautomatically or manually.If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scansthrough all available sites when the signal from thecurrent site is weak or when the radio is unable todetect any signal from the current site. It then lockson to the repeater with the strongest Received SignalStrength Indicator (RSSI) value.In a manual site search, the radio searches for thenext site in the roam list that is currently in range (butwhich may not have the strongest signal) and lockson to it.Note:Each channel can only have either Scan orRoam enabled, not both at the same time.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode47English
Channels with this feature enabled can be added to aparticular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s)in the roam list during the automatic roam operationto locate the best site.A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels(including the Selected Channel).Note:You cannot manually add or delete an entry tothe roam list. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator for more information.Capacity Plus Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration ofthe MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool ofchannels to support hundreds of users and up to 254Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficientlyutilize the available number of programmed channelswhile in Repeater Mode.You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to accessa feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via aprogrammable button press.Your radio also has features that are available inconventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, CapacityPlus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minordifferences in the way each feature works does notaffect the performance of your radio.Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information on this configuration.Linked Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channeltrunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radiosystem, combining the best of both Capacity Plus andIP Site Connect configurations.Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extendtrunking communication beyond the reach of a singlesite, by connecting to different available sites whichare connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. Italso provides an increase in capacity by efficientlyutilizing the combined available number ofprogrammed channels supported by each of theavailable sites.When the radio moves out of range from one site andinto the range of another, it connects to the new site'srepeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions.Depending on your settings, this is doneautomatically or manually.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode48English
If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scansthrough all available sites when the signal from thecurrent site is weak or when the radio is unable todetect any signal from the current site. It then lockson to the repeater with the strongest Received SignalStrength Indicator (RSSI) value.In a manual site search, the radio searches for thenext site in the roam list that is currently in range (butwhich may not have the strongest signal) and lockson to it.Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled canbe added to a particular roam list. The radio searchesthese channels during the automatic roam operationto locate the best site.Note:You cannot manually add or delete an entry tothe roam list. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator for more information.Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features notapplicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not availablein the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if youtry to access a feature not applicable to LinkedCapacity Plus via a programmable button press.Check with your dealer or system administrator formore information on this configuration.Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode49English
Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus ModeSelecting a ZoneA zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports upto 1000 channels and 250 zones, with a maximum of160 channels per zone.1Access the Zone feature.Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedZone buttonPress the programmed Zonebutton.Radio menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Zone and press to select.The current zone is displayed and indicated by a.2Select the required zone.RadioCon-trolSteps or  or   and scroll to the requiredzone.Key-pad 1Enter the first character of the re-quired zone.2A blinking cursor appears allowingyou to continue entering the subse-quent characters of the requiredzone.Note:Press   to move one space tothe left. Press   to move onespace to the right. Press the key to delete any unwant-ed characters. Long press to change the text entry method.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode50English
RadioCon-trolStepsNote:The first line of the displayshows the characters you keyedin. The second line shows azone that matches what youhave already keyed in. The aliassearch is case-insensitive. Ifthere are two or more with thesame name, the radio displaysthe zone that is listed first in thezone list.3Press   to select.The display shows <Zone> Selectedmomentarily and returns to the selected zonescreen.Selecting a ChannelTransmissions are sent and received on a channel.Depending on your radio’s configuration, eachchannel may have been programmed differently tosupport different groups of users or supplied withdifferent features. After selecting the relevant Zone,select the relevant channel you require to transmit orreceive on.Turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob toselect the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or groupalias or ID.Receiving and Responding to a Radio CallOnce the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID isdisplayed, you can proceed to receive and respond tocalls.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode51English
The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green when the radio isreceiving.Note:The LED lights up solid green while the radiois transmitting and double blinks green whenthe radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call.To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, yourradio must have the same Privacy Key, ORthe same Key Value and Key ID (programmedby your dealer), as the transmitting radio (theradio you are receiving the call from).See Privacy on page 129 for moreinformation. Receiving and Responding to a Group CallTo receive a call from a group of users, your radiomust be configured as part of that group.When you receive a Group Call (while on the Homescreen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows the caller alias. The second text line displaysthe group call alias. Your radio unmutes and theincoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.• If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone themoment the transmitting radio releases thePTT button, indicating the channel is free foryou to respond. Press the PTT button torespond.• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,press the PTT button to stop the current callfrom the transmitting radio and free the channelfor you to talk/respond.The LED lights up solid green.2Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.• The Talk Permit Tone•The PTT Sidetone 3Release the PTT button to listen.If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode52English
Note:See Making a Group Call on page 57 fordetails on making a Group Call.Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio.When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Yourradio unmutes and the incoming call sounds throughthe speaker of the radio.1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.• If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone themoment the transmitting radio releases thePTT button, indicating the channel is free foryou to respond. Press the PTT button torespond.• If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled,press the PTT button to stop the current callfrom the transmitting radio and free the channelfor you to talk/respond.The LED lights up solid green.2Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.3Release the PTT button to listen.If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.See Making a Private Call on page 58 for details onmaking a Private Call.Receiving an All CallAn All Call is a call from an individual radio to everyradio on the channel. It is used to make importantannouncements requiring the user’s full attention.When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and theLED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows the caller alias. The secondtext line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes andthe incoming call sounds through the radio speaker.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode53English
Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to theprevious screen before receiving the call. An All Calldoes not wait for a predetermined time before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you hear a short alert tone the moment thetransmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicatingthe channel is now available for use.You cannot respond to an All Call.Note:See Making an All Call on page 59 fordetails on making an All Call.Note:The radio stops receiving the All Call if youswitch to a different channel while receivingthe call. During an All Call, you will not be ableto use any programmed button functions untilthe call ends.Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio. It is a Private Call on ananalog system.When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias orSelective Call or Alert with Call. The first textline shows the Private Call icon. The radio displaysSelective Call or Alert with Call. Your radiounmutes and the incoming call sounds through theradio's speaker.1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.2Press the PTT button to respond to the call.The LED lights up solid green.3Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.4Release the PTT button to listen.If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.See Making a Private Call on page 58 for details onmaking a Private Call.Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode54English
Phone Call as Private CallWhen you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, thePhone Call icon appears in the top right corner; thedisplay shows the caller alias or Phone Call.If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,the first line of the display shows Unavailable andyour radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to theprevious screen when the call ends.1Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.2Press   to end the call.The display shows Ending Phone Call.If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.Phone Call as Group CallWhen you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, thePhone Group Call icon appears in the top rightcorner; the display shows the group alias and PhoneCall.If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,the display shows Unavailable and your radiomutes the call.1Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.2Press   to end the call.The display shows Ending Phone Call.If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsCall Ended.If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode55English
Phone Call as All CallWhen you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, thePhone Call icon appears in the top right corner; thedisplay shows All Call and Phone Call.If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio,the first line of the display shows Unavailable andyour radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to theprevious screen when the call ends.Note:When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call,you can respond to the call or end the call,only if an All Call type is assigned to thechannel.1Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.2Press   to end the call.The display shows Ending Phone Call.If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsAll Call and Call Ended.If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat this step to end the call.Making a Radio CallAfter selecting your channel, you can select asubscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:• The Channel Selector Knob.• A programmed One Touch Access button – TheOne Touch Access feature allows you to make aGroup or Private Call to a predefined ID easily.This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press. You can ONLY haveone ID assigned to a One Touch Access button.Your radio can have multiple One Touch Accessbuttons programmed. • The programmed number keys – This method isfor Group, Private and All Calls only and is usedwith the keypad (see Making a Group, Private orAll Call with the Programmable Number Key onpage 63). • A programmable button – This method is forPhone Calls only (see Making a Phone Call withthe Programmable Phone Button on page 64). • The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page82). • Manual Dial – This method is for Private andPhone Calls only and is dialed using the keypadMaking and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode56English
(see Making a Phone Call from Contacts on page85, Making a Private Call from Contacts on page84, and Making a Call with the ProgrammableManual Dial Button on page 66). Note:Your radio must have the Privacy featureenabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios withthe same Privacy Key OR the same Key Valueand Key ID as your radio will be able tounscramble the transmission.Note:See Privacy on page 129 for moreinformation. Making a Group CallTo make a call to a group of users, your radio mustbe configured as part of that group.1Do one of the following.• Select the channel with the active group aliasor ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51.•Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the group call alias.4Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen. You see the Group Call icon, the groupalias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID onyour display.5 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode57English
Note:You can also make a Group Call via Contacts(see Making a Group Call from Contacts onpage 83).Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a PrivateCall initiated by an authorized individual radio, yourradio must be programmed for you to initiate a PrivateCall.There are two types of Private Calls. The first type,where a radio presence check is performed prior tosetting up the call, while the other sets up the callimmediately.Only one of these call types can be programmed toyour radio by your dealer.You will hear a negative indicator tone, when youmake a Private Call via the One Touch Accessbutton, the programmed number keys, or the ChannelSelector Knob, if this feature is not enabled.Use the Text Message or Call Alert features tocontact an individual radio. See Text MessageFeatures on page 111 or Call Alert Operation onpage 101 for more information.1Do one of the following.• Select the channel with the active subscriberalias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page51.• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears on the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.5Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.6 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode58English
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display. You canalso make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making aPrivate Call from Contacts on page 84) or perform aquick alphanumeric search for the required alias via akeypad entry (see Making a Group, Private, Phone orAll Call by Alias Search on page 89).Making an All CallThis feature allows you to transmit to all users on thechannel. Your radio must be programmed to allowyou to use this feature.Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.1Select the channel with the active All Call groupalias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows All Call.4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.• The Talk Permit Tone•The PTT Sidetone Making a Selective Call Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/orrespond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorizedindividual radio, your radio must be programmed foryou to initiate a Selective Call.1Select the channel with the active subscriber aliasor ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode59English
The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.• The Talk Permit Tone•The PTT Sidetone 5Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen. If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.The display shows Call Ended.Making a Phone Call with the One Touch AccessButton1Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Phone Call to the predefinedalias or ID.If the entry for the One Touch Access button isempty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If theaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.Enter the access code and press   to proceed.The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone soundsand the display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theMaking and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode60English
Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, enter the extra digits using the keypad andpress   to proceed.The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,and the radio returns to the previous screen.4Press   to end the call.If de-access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows De-AccessCode:. Do one of the following.•Enter the de-access code and press   toproceed. The radio returns to the previousscreen.• Press the One Touch Access button. If theentry for the One Touch Access button isempty, a negative indicator tone sounds.The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press,and the display shows Ending Phone Call.If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 orwait for the telephone user to end the call.Note:When the telephone user ends the call, atone sounds and the display shows CallEnded.If the call ends while you are entering theextra digits requested by the Phone Call,your radio returns to the screen you wereon prior to initiating the call.During channel access, press   todismiss the call attempt. A tone sounds toindicate success.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode61English
During the call, if you press the One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess codeas the input for extra digits, your radioattempts to end the call.The access or deaccess code cannot bemore than 10 characters.Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call ButtonNote:Programmable buttons press must be initiatedfrom the Home screen.The One Touch Call feature allows you to easilymake a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call aliasor ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press.You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to aOne Touch Call button. Your radio can have multipleOne Touch Call buttons programmed.1Press the programmed One Touch Call button tomake a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Callalias or ID.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.5Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.6If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode62English
Making a Group, Private or All Call with theProgrammable Number Key The Programmable Number Key feature allows you tomake a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined aliasor ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all theavailable number keys on a keypad.You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to anumber key, but you can have more than one numberkey associated to an alias or ID.1Long press the programmed number key, whenyou are on the Home screen, to make a Group,Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID.If the number key is not associated to an entry, anegative indicator tone sounds.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group/PrivateCall icon appears in the top right corner. The firsttext line shows the caller alias. The second textline displays either the call status for a Private Callor All Call for All Call.4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.• The Talk Permit Tone• the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only)5Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.6 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when thecall ends.See Assigning an Entry to a ProgrammableNumber Key on page 90 for details on assigningan entry to a number key on the keypad.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode63English
Making a Phone Call with the Programmable PhoneButton 1Press the programmed Phone button to enter intothe Phone Entry list.2 or   to the required subscriber alias or ID,and press   to select.If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.Enter the access code and press the   buttonto proceed.The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner. The second text line displays the callstatus.If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds andthe display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.3Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.4Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.5To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, do one of the following.• Press any keypad key to begin the input of theextra digits. The first line of the display showsExtra Digits:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digitsand press the   button to proceed. TheDTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to theprevious screen.• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMFtone sounds. If the entry for the One TouchMaking and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode64English
Access button is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds.6Press   to end the call.If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess codeand press the   button to proceed. The radioreturns to the previous screen.The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 4and 6 or wait for the telephone user to end thecall.When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a tone sounds and the displayshows Press OK to Place Phone Call.When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.Note:During channel access, press   todismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.During the call, when you press OneTouch Access button with the deaccesscode preconfigured or enter the deaccesscode as the input for extra digits, your radioattempts to end the call.Note:The access or deaccess code cannot bemore than 10 characters.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode65English
Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton Making a Private Call1Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.2 or   to Radio Contact and press   toselect.The display shows Number:.3Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.5Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.7Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.8If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.Making a Phone Call1Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.2 or   to Phone Contact and press   toselect.The display shows Number:.3Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias.If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows Access Code:.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode66English
Enter the access code and press the   buttonto proceed.The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tonesounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephoneuser. The first text line shows the subscriber alias.The Phone Call icon remains in the top rightcorner.If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone soundsand the display shows Phone Call Failed. Yourradio returns to the Access Code input screen. Ifthe access code was preconfigured in theContacts list, the radio returns to the screen youwere on prior to initiating the call.4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.5Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.6To enter extra digits, if requested by the PhoneCall, do one of the following.• Press any keypad key to begin the input of theextra digits. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF tonesounds and the radio returns to the previousscreen.• Press One Touch Access button. The DTMFtone sounds. If the entry for the One TouchAccess button is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds.7Press   to end the call.If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the display shows De-AccessCode:. Enter the deaccess code and press the button to proceed. The radio returns to theprevious screen.The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode67English
If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone soundsand the display shows Call Ended.If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radioreturns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 7 orwait for the telephone user to end the call.When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a tone sounds and the displayshows Press OK to Place Phone Call.When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.If the call ends while you are entering the extradigits requested by the Phone Call, your radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.Note:During channel access, press  todismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds.Note:During the call, when you press OneTouch Access button with the deaccesscode preconfigured or enter the deaccesscode as the input for extra digits, your radioattempts to end the call.Note:The access or deaccess code cannot bemore than 10 characters.Stopping a Radio Call This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group orPrivate Call to free the channel for transmission. Forexample, when a radio experiences a “stuckmicrophone” condition where the PTT button isinadvertently pressed by the user.Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.1Press the programmed Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey button, while on the relevantchannel.The display shows Remote Dekey.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows Remote DekeySuccess, indicating that the channel is now free.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode68English
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows RemoteDekey Failed.TalkaroundYou can continue to communicate when yourrepeater is not operating, or when your radio is out ofthe repeater’s range but within talking range of otherradios.This is called “talkaround”.Note:This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.The Talkaround setting is retained even afterpowering down.You can toggle between talkaround and repeatermodes by pressing the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button or using the radio menu asdescribed next.Note:This feature is not applicable in Citizens Bandchannels that are in the same frequency.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Talkaround and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5Press   to enable/disable the Talkaround.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Monitoring FeaturesMaking and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode69English
Monitoring a ChannelUse the Monitor feature to make sure a channel isclear before transmitting.This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus andLinked Capacity Plus.1Press and hold the programmed Monitor buttonand listen for activity.The Monitor icon appears on the display and theLED lights up solid yellow. You hear radio activityor total silence, depending on how your radio isprogrammed. This indicates that the channel is inuse.The LED double blinks yellow when channel isbusy.2 Wait until you hear “white noise”. This indicatesthat the channel is free.3Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.Permanent MonitorUse the Permanent Monitor feature to continuouslymonitor a selected channel for activity.Note:This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.1Press the programmed Permanent Monitorbutton to activate permanent monitoring of thechannel.Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED lights up solidyellow, and the display shows PermanentMonitor On. The Monitor icon appears on thedisplay.2Press the programmed Permanent Monitorbutton to exit Permanent Monitor mode.Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off, andthe display shows Permanent Monitor Off.Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode70English
Advanced Features in Non-ConnectPlus ModeRadio CheckIf enabled, this feature allows you to determine ifanother radio is active in a system without disturbingthe user of that radio. No audible or visual notificationis shown on the target radio.This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliasesor IDs.Sending a Radio Check1Access the Radio Check feature.RadioControlStepsPro-gram-med Ra-dioCheckbutton1Press the programmed RadioCheck button.2 or   to the required subscrib-er alias or ID and press   to se-lect.RadioControlStepsMenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press to select.3Use one of the steps describednext to select the required sub-scriber alias or ID:• Select the subscriber alias or IDdirectly.• or   to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID andpress   to select.•Use the Manual Dial menu.• or   to Manual Dialand press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode71English
RadioControlSteps• or   to Radio Numberand press   to select.• If there was previously dialedID, the ID appears along witha blinking cursor. Else, thefirst line of the display showsRadio Number:; the secondline of the display shows ablinking cursor. Use the key-pad to edit/enter the ID, andpress   to select.4 or   to Radio Check andpress   to select.The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If the   button is pressed when the radio iswaiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, andthe radio terminates all retries and exits RadioCheck mode.If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicatortone sounds and the display shows positive mininotice.If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negativeindicator tone sounds and the display showsnegative mini notice.Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.Remote MonitorUse the Remote Monitor feature to turn on themicrophone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDsonly). The green LED will blink once on the targetsubscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,remotely, any audible activity surrounding the targetradio.Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode72English
Initiating Remote Monitor1Access the Remote Monitor feature.RadioControlStepsProgram-med Re-mote Mon-itor Button1Press the programmed RemoteMonitor button.2 or   to the required sub-scriber alias or ID and press to select.Menu 1 to access the menu2 or   to Contacts andpress   to select3Use one of the steps describednext to select the required sub-scriber alias or ID• select the subscriber alias orID directlyRadioControlSteps• or   to the requiredsubscriber alias or ID andpress   to select.•use the Manual Dial menu• or   to Manual Di‐al and press   to se-lect.• or   to Radio Num‐ber and press   to se-lect.• If there was previously di-aled ID, the ID appearsalong with a blinking cur-sor. Else, the first line ofthe display shows RadioNumber:; the second lineof the display shows aAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode73English
RadioControlStepsblinking cursor. Use thekeypad to edit/enter theID, and press   to se-lect.4 or   to Remote Mon. andpress   to select.The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows positive mini notice. Your radiostarts playing audio from the monitored radio for aprogrammed duration and display shows Rem.Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio soundsan alert tone and the LED turns off.If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone the display shows negative mininotice.Stopping Remote MonitorRemote Monitor automatically stops after aprogrammed duration or when there is any useroperation on the target radio. Follow the steps belowto manually stop Remote Monitor.1Press the programmed Transmit InterruptRemote Dekey button.The display shows transitional mini notice,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up solid green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode74English
Scan ListsScan lists are created and assigned to individualchannels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activityby cycling through the channel/group sequencespecified in the scan list for the current channel/group.Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with amaximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan listsupports a mixture of both analog and digital entries.You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editinga scan list.You can attach a new scan list to your radio via FrontPanel Programming.Note:This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.Viewing an Entry in the Scan List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan and press   to select.3 or   to Scan List and press   to select.4Use   or   to view each member on the list.The Priority icon appears left of the member’salias, if set, to indicate whether the member is ona Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannothave multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in ascan list.There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None.Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan and press   to select.3 or   to Scan List and press   to select.4Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.5Use the keypad to type the required alias.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode75English
Press   to move one space to the left. Press   tomove one space to the right. Press the   keyto delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method.The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The next lines of the display showthe shortlisted search results.The alias search is case-insensitive. If there aretwo or more entries with the same name, the radiodisplays the entry that is listed first in the scan list.Editing the Scan ListAdding a New Entry to the Scan List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan and press   to select.3 or   to Scan List and press   to select.4 or   to Add Member and press   toselect.5Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControlStepsRadioNaviga-tion But-tons or   to the required alias or ID.Keypad Key in the first character of the re-quired alias.A blinking cursor appears.Press   to move one space to the left.Press   to move one space to theright. Press the   key to deleteany unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode76English
RadioControlStepsThe first line of the display shows thecharacters you keyed in. The nextlines of the display show the short list-ed search results. The alias search iscase-insensitive. If there are two ormore aliases with the same name, theradio displays the alias that is listedfirst in the list.6Press   to select.7 or   to the required priority level and press to select.The display shows positive mini notice, followedimmediately by Add Another?.8Do one of the following:• or   to Yes and press   to select, andrepeat Steps 5 to 7.• or   to No and press   to save thecurrent list.Deleting an Entry from the Scan List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan and press   to select.3 or   to Scan List and press   to select.4Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControlStepsRadioNaviga-tion But-tons or   to the required alias or ID.Keypad Key in the first character of the re-quired alias.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode77English
RadioControlStepsA blinking cursor appears.Press   to move one space to the left.Press   to move one space to theright. Press the   key to deleteany unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method.The first line of the display shows thecharacters you keyed in. The nextlines of the display show the short list-ed search results. The alias search iscase-insensitive. If there are two ormore aliases with the same name, theradio displays the alias that is listedfirst in the list.5Press   to select.6 or   to Delete and press   to select.7Do one of the following:• or   to Yes and press   to deleteentry. The display shows positive mini notice.• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious screen.8Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to delete other entries.After deleting all required aliases or IDs, longpress   to return to the Home screen.Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in theScan List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan and press   to select.3 or   to Scan List and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode78English
4Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControlStepsRadioNaviga-tion But-tons or   to the required alias or ID.Keypad Key in the first character of the re-quired alias.A blinking cursor appears.Press   to move one space to the left.Press   to move one space to theright. Press the   key to deleteany unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method.The first line of the display shows thecharacters you keyed in. The nextlines of the display show the short list-ed search results. The alias search isRadioControlStepscase-insensitive. If there are two ormore aliases with the same name, theradio displays the alias that is listedfirst in the list.5Press   to select.6 or   to Edit Priority and press   toselect.7 or   to the required priority level and press to select.The display shows positive mini notice beforereturning to the previous screen.Note:The Priority icon appears left of the nameof the member.There is no Priority icon if priority is set toNone.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode79English
ScanWhen you start a scan, your radio cycles through theprogrammed scan list for the current channel lookingfor voice activity.The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears onthe status bar.During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digitalchannel, and your radio locks onto an analogchannel, it automatically switches from digital mode toanalog mode for the duration of the call. This is alsotrue for the reverse.There are two ways of initiating scan:•Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scansall the channels/groups in your scan list. Onentering scan, your radio may (depending on thesettings) automatically start on the last scanned“active” channel/group or on the channel wherescan was initiated.•Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automaticallystarts scanning when you select a channel/groupthat has Auto Scan enabled.Note:This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plusand Linked Capacity Plus.Starting and Stopping ScanWhile scanning, the radio will only accept data (e.g.text message, location, or PC data) if received on itsSelected Channel.1Use the Channel Selector Knob to select achannel programmed with a scan list.2 to access the menu.3 or   to Scan and press   to select.4 or   to Scan State and press   toselect.5 or   to required scan state and press to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode80English
•The display shows Scan On when Scan isenabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scanicon appears.•The display shows Scan Off if Scan isdisabled. The LED turns off and the scan icondisappears.Responding to a Transmission During a ScanDuring scanning, your radio stops on a channel/groupwhere activity is detected. The radio stays on thatchannel for a programmed time period known as“hang time”.1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.2Press the PTT button during hang time.The LED lights up solid green.3Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.• The Talk Permit Tone•The PTT Sidetone 4Release the PTT button to listen.If you do not respond within the hang time, theradio returns to scanning other channels/groups.Deleting a Nuisance ChannelIf a channel continually generates unwanted calls ornoise (termed a “nuisance” channel), you cantemporarily remove the unwanted channel from thescan list.This capability does not apply to the channeldesignated as the Selected Channel.Deleting a “nuisance” channel is only possiblethrough the programmed Nuisance Channel Deletebutton. This feature is not accessible through themenu.1When your radio “locks on to” an unwanted ornuisance channel, press the programmedNuisance Channel Delete button until you hear atone.2Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button.The nuisance channel is deleted.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode81English
Restoring a Nuisance ChannelTo restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one ofthe following:• Turn the radio off and then power it on again.• Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scanbutton or menu.•Change the channel via the Channel SelectorKnob.Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage inareas where there are multiple base stationstransmitting identical information on different analogchannels.Your radio scans analog channels of multiple basestations and performs a voting process to select thestrongest received signal. Once that is established,your radio unmutes to transmissions from that basestation.The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan iconappears on the status bar.To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan,follow the same procedures as Responding to aTransmission During a Scan on page 81.Contact SettingsContacts provides “address-book” capabilities on yourradio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID thatyou use to initiate a call.Each entry, depending on context, associates withone of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, AllCall, PC Call or Dispatch Call.PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They areonly available with the applications. Refer to the dataapplications documentation for more information.Note:If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,you can make privacy-enabled Group Call,Private Call, and All Call on that channel. Onlytarget radios with the same Privacy Key, or thesame Key Value and Key ID as your radio willbe able to unscramble the transmission.See Privacy on page 129 for moreinformation. Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode82English
Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assigneach entry to a programmable number key or moreon a keypad. If an entry is assigned to a number key,your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analogcontacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximumof 500 members for each Contacts list.Each entry within Contacts displays the followinginformation:• Call Type• Call Alias• Call IDNote:You can add or edit subscriber IDs for theDigital Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDscan only be performed by your dealer.For the Analog Contacts list, you can onlyview the subscriber IDs, edit the subscriberIDs, and initiate a Call Alert. Adding anddeleting capabilities can only be performed byyour dealer.Making a Group Call from Contacts1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3 or   to the required group alias or ID.4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.5Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.6Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.• The Talk Permit Tone•The PTT Sidetone 7Release the PTT button to listen.When any user in the group responds, the LEDblinks green. You see the Group Call icon, thegroup ID, and the user’s ID on your display.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode83English
8 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:• select the subscriber alias or ID directly• or   to the required subscriber alias orID and press   to select.•use the Manual Dial menu• or   to Manual Dial and press to select.• or   to Radio Number and press to select.• If there was previously dialed subscriberalias or ID, the alias or ID appears alongwith a blinking cursor. Else, the first line ofthe display shows Radio Number:; thesecond line of the display shows a blinkingcursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID.Press   to select.4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.5Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.7Release the PTT button to listen.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode84English
When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen and the display shows the transmittinguser's ID.8 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.The display shows Call Ended.Making a Phone Call from Contacts1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:• select the subscriber alias or ID directly• or   to the required subscriber alias orID and press   to select.•use the Manual Dial menu• or   to Manual Dial and press to select.• or   to Phone Number and press to select.•The first line of the display shows PhoneNumber: , the second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad toenter a telephone number, and press to select the entered number.If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds and the display shows Phone CallInvalid # .When you press PTT button while in the PhoneContacts screen, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Press OK to PlacePhone Call.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode85English
4 or   to Call Phone and press   toselect.5If the access code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display showsAccess Code: . The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the access codeand press   to proceed.During channel access, press   to dismiss thecall attempt and a negative indicator tone sounds.Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen.The access code cannot be more than 10characters.The first line of the display shows Calling. Thesecond line of the display shows the subscriberalias or ID, and the Phone Call icon.If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hearthe dialing tone of the telephone user. The first lineof the display shows the subscriber alias or ID,and the RSSI icon. The second line of the displayshows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon.If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the displayshows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns tothe Access Code input screen. If the access codewas preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radioreturns to the screen you were on prior to initiatingthe call.6Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.7Do one of the following:• Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.Note:The RSSI icon disappears duringtransmission.To enter extra digits, if requested by thePhone Call, press any keypad key tobegin the input of extra digits. The firstline of the display shows ExtraDigits: . The second line of thedisplay shows a blinking cursor. Enterthe extra digits and press   toAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode86English
proceed. The DTMF tone sounds andthe radio returns to the previous screen.If the call ends while you are enteringthe extra digits requested by the PhoneCall, your radio returns to the screenyou were on prior to initiating the call.• Press One Touch Access button.Note:The DTMF tone sounds.If the entry for the One Touch Accessbutton is empty, a negative indicatortone sounds.During the call, when you press One TouchAccess button with the deaccess codepreconfigured or enter the deaccess code as theinput for extra digits, your radio attempts to endthe call.During channel access and access/deaccess codeor extra digits transmission, your radio responds toOn/Off/Volume Control Knob and ChannelSelector Knob only. A tone sounds for everyinvalid input.8Press   to end the call.9If deaccess code was not preconfigured in theContacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess codeand press   to proceed.The deaccess code cannot be more than 10characters.The DTMF tone sounds and the display showsEnding Phone Call.If successful, a tone sounds and the display showsPhone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the CallPhone screen.If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the PhoneCall screen. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 or wait for thetelephone user to end the call.When the telephone user ends the call, a tonesounds and the display shows Phone CallEnded.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode87English
Making a Call Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.Note:Press   button or   to exit alias search.If you release the PTT button while the radio issetting up the call, it exits without anyindication and returns to the previous screen.Your radio may be programmed to perform aradio presence check prior to setting up thePrivate Call. If the target radio is not available,you hear a short tone and see negative mininotice on the display. The radio returns to themenu prior to initiating the radio presencecheck.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.4Use the keypad to type the required alias.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   tomove one space to the right. Press the   keyto delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method.The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The next lines of the display showthe short listed search results. The alias search iscase-insensitive. If there are two or more entrieswith the same name, the radio displays the entrythat is listed first in the Contacts list.5Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.6Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.7Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode88English
8Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.9 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.Press the PTT button to respond.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.The display shows Call Ended.Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by AliasSearchYou can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.Note:Press   button or   to exit alias search.If you release the PTT button while the radio issetting up the call, it exits without anyindication and returns to the previous screen.Your radio may be programmed to perform aradio presence check prior to setting up thePrivate Call. If the target radio is not available,you hear a short tone and see Party NotAvailable on the display; the radio returns tothe menu prior to initiating the radio presencecheck.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3Key in the first character of the required alias.A blinking cursor appears.4Use the keypad to type the required alias.Press to move one space to the left. Press tomove one space to the right. Press the   keyto delete any unwanted characters.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode89English
The first line of the display shows the charactersyou keyed in. The second line of the displayshows an alias that matches what you have keyedin. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there aretwo or more entries with the same name, the radiodisplays the entry that is listed first in the Contactslist.5 or   to scroll to desired entry, if necessary.6Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.7Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The first linedisplays the target radio’s ID. The second linedisplays the call type and the Call icon.8Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.9Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.10 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetarget radio releases the PTT button, indicating thechannel is free for you to respond. Press the PTTbutton to respond.If there is no voice activity for a programmedperiod of time, the call ends.You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key Note:See Making a Group, Private or All Call withthe Programmable Number Key on page 63for details on making a Group, Private or AllCall with the programmed number key(s).1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3 or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode90English
4 or   to Program Key and press   toselect.5 or   to the desired number key and press to select.If the number key is currently assigned to anotherentry, the display shows The Key is AlreadyAssigned and then, the first line of the displayshows Overwrite?. Do one of the following.• or   to Yes and press   to overwritethe number key assignment.• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious step.Each entry can be associated to different numberkeys. You see a   before each number key that isassigned to an entry. If the   is before Empty, thatnumber key is not assigned.If a number key is assigned to an entry in aparticular mode, this feature is not supported whenyou long press the number key in another mode.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.Removing the Association between Entry andProgrammable Number Key 1Access the required alias or ID via:RadioControlStepsProgram-med num-ber keyLong press the programmed numberkey to the required alias or ID; press to select.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-phabetically sorted.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode91English
RadioControlSteps3 or   to the required sub-scriber alias or ID and press to select.2 or   to Program Key and press   toselect.3 or   to Empty and press   to select.The first line of the display shows Clear fromall keys? .4 or   to Yes and press   to select.Note:When an entry is deleted, the associationbetween the entry and its programmednumber key(s) is removed.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.Adding a New Contact1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.3 or   to New Contact and press   toselect.4 or   to the required contact type, eitherRadio Contact or Phone Contact, and press to select.5Use the keypad to enter the contact number andpress   to confirm.6Use the keypad to enter the contact name andpress   to confirm.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode92English
7If adding a Radio Contact,   or   to therequired ringer type and press   to select.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.Setting a Default Contact 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.3 or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.4 or   to Set as Default and press   toselect.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.A   appears beside the selected default alias orID.Call Indicator SettingsActivating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call AlertYou can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Call Alert.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alert and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode93English
6 or   to Call Alert and press   toselect.The current tone is indicated by a  .7 or   to the required tone and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption. appears beside selected tone.Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for PrivateCalls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedPrivate Call.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.6 or   to Private Call and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for SelectiveCall You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Selective Call.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode94English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alert and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.6 or   to Selective Call and press   toselect.The current tone is indicated by a  .You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.7 or   to the required tone and press   toselect. appears beside selected tone.Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TextMessageYou can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedText Message.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode95English
6 or   to Text Message and press   toselect.The current tone is indicated by a  .7 or   to the required tone and press   toselect. appears beside selected tone.Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TelemetryStatus with TextYou can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedTelemetry Status with Text.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.6 or   to Telemetry and press   to select.The current tone is indicated by a  .7Do one of the following:• or   to the preferred tone and press to select. The display shows Tone <Number>Selected and a   appears left of the selectedtone.• or   to Turn Off and press   toselect. The display shows Telemetry RingerOff and a   appears left of Turn Off.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode96English
Assigning Ring StylesYou can program your radio to sound one of tenpredefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alertor a Text Message from a particular contact.The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigatethrough the list.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3 or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.4 or   to Edit Ringtone and press   toselect.5 or   to the required tone and press   toselect.   appears beside selected tone.Selecting a Ring Alert TypeNote:The programmed Ring Alert Type button isassigned via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.You can program the radio calls to onepredetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status isdisabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon.If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alerttype is displayed.The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentaryring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is arepetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate,the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is anyincoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert orMessage). It sounds like a good key tone or missedcall.For radios with batteries that support the vibratefeature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, theavailable Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring,Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate.For radios with batteries that do not support thevibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating beltAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode97English
clip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. Theavailable Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing oneof the following actions.•Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button toaccess the Ring Alert Type menu.a) Press   or   to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &Vibrate or Silent and press   to select.•Access this feature via the menu.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to Utilities and press to select.c) Press   or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.d) Press   or   to Tones/Alerts and press to select.e) Press   or   to Ring Alert Type andpress   to select.f) Press   or   to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &Vibrate or Silent and press   to select.Configuring Vibrate StyleNote:The programmed Vibrate Style button isassigned via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clipis attached to the radio with a battery that supportsthe vibrate feature.You can configure the vibrate style by performing oneof the following actions.•Press the programmed Vibrate Style button toaccess the Vibrate Style menu.a) Press   or   to Short, Medium, or Longand press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode98English
•Access this feature via the menu.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to Utilities and press to select.c) Press   or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.d) Press   or   to Tones/Alerts and press to select.e) Press   or   to Vibrate Style and press to select.f) Press   or   to Short, Medium, or Longand press   to select.Escalating Alarm Tone VolumeYou can program your radio to continually alert youwhen a radio call remains unanswered. This is doneby automatically increasing the alarm tone volumeover time. This feature is known as Escalert.Call Log FeaturesYour radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call logfeature to view and manage recent calls.You can perform the following tasks in each of yourcall lists:• Store ID to Contacts• Delete•View DetailsViewing Recent CallsThe lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Call Log and press   to select.3 or   to preferred list and press   toselect.The display shows the most recent entry at the topof the list.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode99English
4 or   to view the list.Press the PTT button to start a Private Call withthe current selected alias or ID.Storing an Alias from a Call ListYou can also store an ID without an alias.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Call Log and press   to select.3 or   to the required list and press   toselect.4 or   to Store and press   to select.A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in thealias for that ID and press  . The displayshows positive mini notice.Deleting a Call from a Call List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Call Log and press   to select.3 or   to the required list and press   toselect.When you select a call list and it contains noentries, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page152).4 or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.5 or   to Delete Entry? and press   toselect.6Do one of the following:Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode100English
•Press   to select Yes to delete the entry.The display shows Entry Deleted.• or   to No, and press the   button toreturn to the previous screen.Viewing Details from a Call List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Call Log and press   to select.3 or   to the required list and press   toselect.4 or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.5 or   to View Details and press   toselect.Display shows details.Call Alert OperationCall Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radiouser to call you back when they are able to do so.This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDsonly and is accessible through the menu via Contactsor manual dial.Receiving and Responding to a Call AlertWhen you receive a Call Alert page, you see thenotification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID ofthe calling radio on the display.When you hear a repetitive tone and the LEDblinks yellow, do one of the following:• Press the PTT button while the display stillshows the Call Alert in the Notification List torespond with a Private Call.•Press   to exit the Notification List. The alertis moved to the Missed Call Log.See Notification List on page 146 for details aboutthe Notification List.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode101English
See Call Log Features on page 99 for detailsabout the Missed Call List.Making a Call Alert from the Contact List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.3Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:• select the subscriber alias or ID directly• or   to the required subscriber alias orID and press   to select.•use the Manual Dial menu• or   to Manual Dial and press to select.• or   to Radio Number and press to select.•The first line of the display shows RadioNumber: , the second line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Enter thesubscriber ID you want to page and press.4 or   to Call Alert and press   toselect.The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows positive mini notice.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows negative mini notice.Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access ButtonPress the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Call Alert to the predefined aliasor ID.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode102English
The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows positive mini notice.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows negative mini notice.Emergency OperationAn Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a criticalsituation. You are able to initiate an Emergency atany time on any screen display even when there isactivity on the current channel.Your dealer can set the duration of a button press forthe programmed Emergency button, except for longpress, which is similar with all other buttons:Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75seconds.Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75seconds.The Emergency button is assigned with theEmergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer forthe assigned operation of the Emergency button.Note:If the short press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode,then the long press for the Emergency buttonis assigned to exit the Emergency mode.If the long press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode,then the short press for the Emergency buttonis assigned to exit the Emergency mode.Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:•Emergency Alarm• Emergency Alarm with Call•Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Note:Only one of the Emergency Alarms above canbe assigned to the programmed Emergencybutton.In addition, each alarm has the following types:•Regular – Radio transmits an alarm signal andshows audio and/or visual indicators.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode103English
•Silent – Radio transmits an alarm signal withoutany audio or visual indicators. Radio receives callswithout any sound through the radio’s speaker,until you press the PTT button to initiate the call.•Silent with Voice – Radio transmits an alarmsignal without any audio or visual indicators, butallow incoming calls to sound through the radio’sspeaker.Receiving an Emergency AlarmOn receiving an emergency alarm the emergencyicon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red andthe radio displays the emergency caller alias. If morethan one alarm has occurred all emergency calleraliases are displayed in an Alarm List.1When receiving an emergency alarm, do one ofthe following:• If a single emergency call alias is displayed,press   to view more details. Press again to view your action details.• If the multiple emergency caller aliases aredisplayed in the Alarm List,   or   to therequired alias and press   to view moredetails. Press   again to view your actionitems.2Press   and select Yes to exit the Alarm List.To revisit the Alarm List, press   to access themenu and select Alarm List.Responding to an Emergency Alarm1In the Alarm List,   or   to the required alias.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled,you will hear a short alert tone the moment thetransmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is now available for use.3Press PTT button to transmit non-emergencyvoice to the same group that the EmergencyAlarm was targeted to.Emergency voice can only be transmitted by theemergency initiating radio. All other radiosAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode104English
(including the emergency receiving radio) transmitnon-emergency voice.The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remainsin the Emergency mode.4Do one of the following:• Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (ifenabled) and speak clearly into themicrophone.• Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.5Release the PTT button to listen.When the emergency initiating radio responds, theLED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on yourdisplay.6Your radio displays the Alarm List.Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving theEmergency AlarmExit the Emergency mode by performing one ofthe following actions:• Delete the alarm items, see Deleting an AlarmItem from the Alarm List for more information.• Power down the radio.Sending an Emergency AlarmThis feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm,a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indicationon a group of radios.If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode.Press the programmed Emergency On button.The display shows one of the following:•Tx Alarm and the destination alias.•Tx Telegram and the destination alias.The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon appears on the Home screen display.When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement isreceived, the Emergency tone sounds and theLED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent.If your radio does not receive an EmergencyAlarm acknowledgement, and after all retries haveAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode105English
been exhausted, a tone sounds and the displayshows Alarm Failed.Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode andreturns to the Home screen.Sending an Emergency Alarm with CallThis feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarmto a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by aradio within the group, the group of radios cancommunicate over a programmed Emergencychannel.If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, orallow any received calls to sound through the speakerof the radio, until you press the PTT button to initiatethe call.If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does notdisplay any audio or visual indicators duringEmergency mode, but allow incoming calls to soundthrough the speaker of the radio. The indicators onlyappear once you press the PTT button to initiate, orrespond to, the call.1Press the programmed Emergency On button.The display shows one of the following:•Tx Alarm and the destination alias.•Tx Telegram and the destination alias.The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon appears on the Home screen display.When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement isreceived, the Emergency tone sounds and theLED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent.Your radio enters the emergency call mode whenthe display shows Emergency and the destinationgroup alias.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green and the Group iconappears on the display.4Wait for one of the following tones to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.• The Talk Permit Tone•The PTT Sidetone 5Release the PTT button to listen.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode106English
 If the Channel Free Indication feature isenabled, you hear a short alert tone the momentthe transmitting radio releases the PTT button,indicating the channel is free for you to respond.6Press the PTT button to respond.7Once your call ends, press Emergency Off buttonto exit the Emergency mode.Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarmto a group of radios. The microphone of your radio isautomatically activated, allowing you to communicatewith the group of radios without pressing the PTTbutton.This activated microphone state is also known as “hotmic”.If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled,repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are madefor a programmed duration. During Emergency CycleMode, received calls sound through the speaker ofthe radio.If you press the PTT button during the programmedreceiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicatingthat you should release the PTT button. The radioignores the PTT press and remains in Emergencymode.Note:If you press the PTT button during hot mic,and continue to press it after the hot micduration expires, the radio continues totransmit until you release the PTT button.If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display anyaudio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, orallow any received calls to sound through the speakerof the radio, until the programmed hot mictransmission period is over, and you press the PTTbutton.If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does notdisplay any audio or visual indicators duringEmergency mode when you are making the call withhot mic, but allow sound through the speaker of theradio when the target radio responds after theprogrammed hot mic transmission period is over. Theindicators only appear when you press the PTTbutton.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode107English
Note:If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radiodoes not retry to send the request, and entersthe hot mic state directly.1Press the programmed Emergency On button.The display shows one of the following:•Tx Alarm and the destination alias.•Tx Telegram and the destination alias.The LED lights up solid green and the Emergencyicon is displayed.2Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speakclearly into the microphone.When hot mic has been enabled, the radioautomatically transmits without a PTT button pressuntil the hot mic duration expires. Whiletransmitting, the LED lights up solid green and theEmergency icon appears on the display.3The radio automatically stops transmitting whenthe cycling duration between hot mic and receivingcalls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode isenabled.4Once the hot mic duration expires, the radioautomatically stops transmitting. To transmitagain, press the PTT button.Reinitiating an Emergency ModeNote:This feature is only applicable to the radiosending the Emergency Alarm.There are two instances where this can happen:• You change the channel while the radio is inEmergency mode. This exits the Emergencymode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this newchannel, the radio reinitiates Emergency.• You press the programmed Emergency Onbutton during an Emergency initiation/transmissionstate. This causes the radio to exit this state, andto reinitiate Emergency.Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the EmergencyAlarmYour radio exits Emergency mode when one of thefollowing occurs:•Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received(for Emergency Alarm only).Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode108English
• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted.• The Emergency Off button is pressed.Note:If your radio is powered off, it exits theEmergency mode. The radio will not reinitiatethe Emergency mode automatically when it isturned on again.If you change channels when your radio is inEmergency mode to a channel that has noemergency system configured, No Emergencyis shown on your display.Man DownNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.This feature prompts an emergency to be raised ifthere is a change in the motion of the radio, such asthe tilt of the radio, motion and/or the lack of motionfor a predefined time.Following a change in the motion of the radio for aprogrammed duration, the radio pre-warns the uservia an audio indicator indicating that a change inmotion is detected.If there is still no acknowledgment by the user beforethe predefined reminder timer expires, the radioinitiates an Emergency Alarm or an Emergency Call.You can program the reminder timer via CPS.Turning the Man Down Feature On or OffNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only. The programmed Man Downbutton and Man Down settings are assignedvia CPS. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator to determine how your radio hasbeen programmed.If you disable the Man Down feature, theprogrammed alert tone sounds repeatedly untilthe Man Down feature is enabled. A devicefailure tone sounds when the Man Downfeature fails while powering up. The devicefailure tone continues until the radio resumesnormal operation.If you enable Man Down to maximumsensitivity and set Vibrate Style to high, theradio automatically restricts Vibrate Style tomedium. This function prevents high VibrateAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode109English
Style from initiating the Man Down emergencyfeature.You can enable or disable this feature by performingone of the following actions.•Press the programmed Man Down button totoggle the feature on or off.•Access this feature via the menu.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to Utilities and press to select.c) Press   or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.d)Press   or   to Man Down and press to select.You can also use   or   to change theselected option.e)Press   to enable or disable Man Down.This display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears beside Enabled.Analog Message Encode Your radio is able to send pre-programmedmessages from the Message list to a radio alias or tothe dispatcher.Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher1 to access the menu.2 or   to Message and press   to select.3 or   to Quick Text and press   toselect.4 or   to the required message. Press   tosend.The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode110English
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds andthe display shows negative mini notice.Text Message FeaturesYour radio is able to receive data, for example a textmessage, from another radio or an e-mail application.The maximum length of characters for sending a textmessage, including the subject line (seen whenreceiving message from an e-mail application),depends on CPS configuration which can beconfigured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radiocan receive a text message with maximum length of280 characters.If user forwards a text message with characters morethan the maximum length, the text message will betruncated to the maximum length.The radio exits the current screen once the inactivitytimer expires. Any text message in the writing/editingscreen will automatically be saved to the Drafts folder.Note:Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Writing and Sending a Text Message1Access the Text Message feature.Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Compose and press   to select.A blinking cursor appears.3Use the keypad to type your message.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode111English
characters. Long press   to change text entrymethod.4Press   once message is composed.5Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.• or   to Send, and press   to send themessage.• or   to Save, and press   to save themessage to the Drafts folder.• to edit the message.• to choose between deleting the messageor saving it to the Drafts folder.The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115.Sending a Quick Text Message with the One TouchAccess ButtonPress the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to send a predefined Quick Text messageto a predefined alias or ID.The display shows the transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.If the message is sent, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows the positive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows the negative mini notice.If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115).Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode112English
Accessing the Drafts FolderYou can save a text message to send it at a latertime.If a PTT button press or a mode change causes theradio to exit the text message writing/editing screenwhile you are in the process of writing or editing a textmessage, your current text message is automaticallysaved to the Drafts folder.The most recent saved text message is always addedto the top of the Drafts list.The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) lastsaved messages. When the folder is full, the nextsaved text message automatically replaces the oldesttext message in the folder.Note:Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Viewing a Saved Text Message1Access the Text Message feature.Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Drafts and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message1Press   again while viewing the message.2 or   to Edit and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode113English
A blinking cursor appears.3Use the keypad to type your message.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod.4Press   once message is composed.5Select the message recipient by• or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved tothe Sent Items folder and marked with a SendFailed icon.Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts1Access the Text Message feature.Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode114English
2 or   to Drafts and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.4 or   to Delete and press   to delete thetext message.Managing Fail-to-Send Text MessagesYou can select one of the following options while atthe Resend option screen:• Resend• Forward•EditNote:If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is nota match, you can only edit and forward a Fail-to-Send message.Resending a Text MessagePress   to resend the same message to thesame subscriber/group alias or ID.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows the positive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, the display showsthe negative mini notice.Forwarding a Text MessageSelect Forward to send the message to anothersubscriber/group alias or ID.1 or   to Forward and press   to select.2Select the message recipient by• or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode115English
a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.Editing a Text MessageSelect Edit to edit the message before sending it.Note:If a subject line is present (for messagesreceived from an e-mail application), youcannot edit it.1 or   to Edit and press   to select.A blinking cursor appears.2Use the keypad to edit your message.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod.3Press   once message is composed.4Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.• or   to Send, and press   to send themessage.• or   to Save, and press   to save themessage to the Drafts folder.• to edit the message.• to choose between deleting the messageor saving it to the Drafts folder.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode116English
5If you are sending the message, select therecipient by• or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display shows RadioNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .The display shows Text Message:<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirmingyour message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.Managing Sent Text MessagesOnce a message is sent to another radio, it is savedin Sent Items. The most recent sent text message isalways added to the top of the Sent Items list.The Sent Items folder is capable of storing amaximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When thefolder is full, the next sent text message automaticallyreplaces the oldest text message in the folder.Note:Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Viewing a Sent Text Message1Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode117English
2 or   to Sent Items and press   toselect.3 or   to the required message and press to select.A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.The icon at the top right corner of the screenindicates the status of the message (see Sent ItemIcons on page 43).Sending a Sent Text MessageYou can select one of the following options whileviewing a sent text message:• Resend• Forward•Edit• DeleteNote:If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is nota match, you can only edit, forward, or deletea Sent message.1Press   again while viewing the message.2 or   to one of the following options andpress   to select.Option StepsFor‐wardSelect Forward to send the selectedtext message to another subscriber/group alias or ID (see Forwarding a TextMessage on page 115).Edit Select Edit to edit the selected textmessage before sending it (see Editinga Text Message on page 116).De‐leteSelect Delete to delete the text mes-sage.Re‐send Select Resend to resend the selectedtext message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode118English
Option StepsThe display shows transitional mini no-tice, confirming that the same messageis being sent to the same target radio.If the message is sent successfully, atone sounds and the display shows pos-itive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, a lowtone sounds and the display shows neg-ative mini notice.If the message fails to send, the radioreturns you to the Resend option screen.Press   to resend the message tothe same subscriber/group alias or ID.Note:Changing the volume, andpressing any button, except for,  , or  , returns you tothe message.The radio exits the Resend op-tion screen if you press the PTTOption Stepsbutton to initiate a Private orGroup Call, or to respond to aGroup Call. The radio also exitsthe screen when it receives atext or telemetry message, anemergency call or alarm, or acall alert.The display returns to the Re‐send option screen if you pressthe PTT button to respond to aPrivate Call (except when theradio is displaying the MissedCall screen), and at the end ofan All Call.If you exit the message sending screen while themessage is being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the Sent Items folderwithout providing any indication in the display orvia sound.If the radio changes mode or powers down beforethe status of the message in Sent Items isupdated, the radio cannot complete any In-Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode119English
Progress messages and automatically marks itwith a Send Failed icon.The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send any new messageand automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items1Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Sent Items and press   toselect.When you select Sent Items and it contains notext messages, the display shows List Empty,and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turnedon (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page152).3 or   to Delete All and press   toselect.4Choose one of the following.• or   to Yes and press   to select. Thedisplay shows positive mini notice.• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious screen.Receiving a Text MessageWhen your radio receives a message, the displayshows the alias or ID of the sender and the Messageicon.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode120English
You can select one of the following options whenreceiving a text message:• Read• Read Later•DeleteNote:The radio exits the Text Message alert screenand sets up a Private or Group Call to thesender of the messageif the PTT button ispressed when the radio is displaying the alertscreen.Reading a Text Message1 or   to Read? and press   to select.Selected message in the Inbox opens.A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.2Do one of the following:•Press   to return to the Inbox.•Press   a second time to reply, forward, ordelete the text message.Managing Received Text MessagesUse the Inbox to manage your text messages. TheInbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30messages.Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according tothe most recently received.Your radio supports the following options for textmessages:• Reply• Forward• Delete• Delete AllNote:If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital orCapacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is nota match, you can only forward, delete, ordelete all Received messages.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode121English
Note:Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages and press   to select.3 or   to Inbox and press   to select.4 or   to view the messages.A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.5Do one of the following:•Press   to select the current message, andpress   again to reply, forward, or deletethat message.•Long press   to return to the Home screen.Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message fromthe Inbox1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages and press   to select.3 or   to Inbox and press   to select.4 or   to the required message and press to select.You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status textmessage.The display shows Telemetry: <Status TextMessage>.5Long press   to return to the Home screen.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode122English
Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox1Access the Text Message feature.Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Inbox and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.4Press   once more to access the sub-menu.5Do one of the following:• or   to Reply and press   to select.• or   to Quick Reply and press   toselect.A blinking cursor appears.6Use your keypad to write/edit your message.7Press   once message is composed.The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows positive mini notice.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode123English
If the message cannot be sent, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115).Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox1Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Inbox and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.A subject line may be shown if the message isfrom an e-mail application.4Press   once more to access the sub-menu.5 or   to Delete and press   to select.6 or   to Yes and press   to select.The display shows positive mini notice and thescreen returns to the Inbox.Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox1Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode124English
Radio Con-trolsSteps2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Inbox and press   to select.When you select Inbox and it contains no textmessages, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page152).3 or   to Delete All and press   toselect.4 or   to Yes and press   to select.The display shows positive mini notice.Job TicketsYour radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which aremessages from the dispatcher listing out tasks thatneed to be performed.You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort theminto Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are“All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check withyour dealer or system administrator for an additional10 folders.Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets,all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New JobTickets and Job Tickets with recent change in stateare listed first. Upon reaching the maximum numberof Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automaticallyreplaces the last Job Ticket in your radio.Note:Job Tickets are retained even after radio ispowered down and powered up again.Your radio will automatically detect anddiscard the duplicated Job Tickets with thesame subject line.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode125English
Accessing the Job Ticket FolderAccess the Job Ticket folder.RadioControlStepsPro-gram-medJobTicketbutton1Press the programmed Job Ticketbutton.2 or   to the required folder andpress   to select.Note:You can also press and the corresponding num-ber key (1–9) to access therequired folder.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Job Tickets andpress   to select.RadioControlSteps3 or   to the required folder andpress   to select.Note:You can also press and the corresponding num-ber key (1–9) to access therequired folder.4 or   to the required Job Ticketand press   to select.Logging In and Out of the Remote ServerThis feature allows you to log in and log out of theremote server by using your user ID via the menu.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Log In and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode126English
If you are already logged in, menu displays LogOut.The display shows a transitional mini notice,confirming that you have been logged insuccessfully.If you have failed to log in, the display shows anegative mini notice.Creating and Sending a Job TicketYour radio is able to create Job Tickets, which isbased on a Job Ticket template and send out tasksthat need to be performed.Note:CPS is required to configure the Job Tickettemplate. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator to determine how your radio hasbeen programmed.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Job Tickets and press   toselect.3 or   to Create Ticket and press   toselect.4Depending on how your radio is configured, doone of the following:If ThenIf your radio isconfigured withone Job Tickettemplate,1Use the keypad to type therequired room number andpress   to select.2 or   to Room Statusand press   to select.3 or   to the requiredoption and press   to se-lect.If your radio isconfigured withmore than oneJob Ticket tem-plate, or   to the required op-tion and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode127English
5 or   to Send and press   to select.The display shows transitional mini notice,confirming your message is sent.If the message is not sent, the display showsnegative mini notice.Responding to the Job Ticket1 to access the menu.2 or   to Job Tickets and press   toselect.3 or   to the required folder and press   toselect.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to access the required folder.4 or   to the required Job Ticket and press to select.5Press   once more to access the sub-menu.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to Quick Reply.6 or   to the required Job Ticket and press to select.You can also press the corresponding number key(1–9) to respond to the job ticket.The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour message being sent.If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the displayshows positive mini notice.If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and thedisplay shows negative mini notice.Deleting a Job TicketDelete a Job Ticket.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode128English
RadioControlStepsPro-gram-medJobTicketbutton1Press the programmed Job Ticketbutton.2 or   to All and press   toselect.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Job Tickets andpress   to select.3 or   to All and press   toselect.4 or   to the required Job Tick-et and press   to select.RadioControlStepsNote:At Step 4, while viewing theJob Ticket, press   todelete.5Press   again while viewing theJob Ticket.6 or   to Delete and press to select.Note:You can also press   todelete.Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to preventeavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channelby the use of a software-based scrambling solution.The signaling and user identification portions of atransmission are not scrambled.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode129English
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channelto send a privacy-enabled transmission, although thisis not a necessary requirement for receiving atransmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel,the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled)transmissions.Your radio supports two types of privacy:• Basic Privacy.• Enhanced Privacy.Only one of the privacy types above can be assignedto the radio.To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or datatransmission, your radio must be programmed tohave the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), or thesame Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy)as the transmitting radio.If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of adifferent Privacy Key, or a different Key Value andKey ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy).Note:This feature is not applicable in Citizens Bandchannels that are in the same frequency.The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio isreceiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.You can access this feature by performing one of thefollowing actions:• Pressing the programmed Privacy button totoggle privacy on or off.• Using the Radio Menu as described by the stepsdescribed next.Note:Some radio models may not offer this Privacyfeature. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Privacy and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode130English
You can also use   or   to change selectedoption.5Press   to enable/disable Privacy.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) featureallows the radio to operate in a radio system with aninterface to telephone systems.1Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a DTMFcall.2Enter the desired number, * or #.You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling allradio tones and alerts (see Turning the RadioTones/Alerts On or Off on page 157).Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your currentradio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or LinkedCapacity Plus configuration.See IP Site Connect on page 47 and Linked CapacityPlus on page 48 for more details about theseconfigurations.Starting an Automatic Site SearchNote:The radio only scans for a new site if thecurrent signal is weak or when the radio isunable to detect any signal from the currentsite. If the RSSI value is strong, the radioremains on the current site.Start Automatic Site search byRadioControlsStepsSiteLockOn/OffbuttonPress the programmed Site LockOn/Off button to toggle the start/stopautomatic site search.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode131English
RadioControlsStepsRadiomenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settingsand press   to select.4 or   to Site Roaming andpress   to select.5 or   to Site Lock andpress   to select.If the current channel is a multi-site channel withan attached roam list and is out of range, the radioalso performs an automatic site search (site isunlocked) during:• a PTT button press.•data transmission.A tone sounds and the display shows SiteUnlocked.The radio then returns to the Home screen. Thedisplay shows the Site Roaming icon and channelalias.The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio isactively searching for a new site, and turns offonce the radio locks on to a site.Stopping an Automatic Site SearchWhen your radio is actively searching for a newsite, you can stop the search byRadioControlsStepsSiteLockOn/OffbuttonPress the programmed Site LockOn/Off button to stop automatic sitesearch.Radiomenu 1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode132English
RadioControlsSteps2 or   to Utilities andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settingsand press   to select.4 or   to Site Roaming andpress   to select.5 or   to Site Lock andpress   to select.A tone sounds and the display shows SiteLocked.The radio then returns to the Home screen. TheLED turns off and the display shows the channelalias.Starting a Manual Site SearchStart a Manual Site Search byRadioControlsStepsManualSiteRoambuttonPress the programmed Manual SiteRoam button to start the manual sitesearch.Radiomenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settingsand press   to select.4 or   to Site Roaming andpress   to select.5 or   to Active Search andpress   to select.A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site,and the LED blinks green.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode133English
If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LEDturns off. The display shows Site <Alias>Found.If there is no available site within range, a tonesounds and the LED turns off. The display showsOut of Range.If a new site is within range, but the radio is unableto connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turnsoff. The display shows Channel Busy.The radio returns to the Home screen.SecurityYou can enable or disable any radio in the system.For example, you might want to disable a stolenradio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enablethat radio, when it is recovered.Note:Performing Radio Disable and Enable islimited to radios with these functions enabled.Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.Radio Disable1Access this feature byRadioCon-trolsStepsRadioDisablebutton1Press the programmed Radio Disa-ble button.2 or   to the required alias or IDand press   to select.Radiomenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-phabetically sorted.3Use one of the steps described nextto select the required subscriberalias or ID:• Select the required alias or ID di-rectly.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode134English
RadioCon-trolsSteps• or   to the requiredalias or ID and press   toselect.•Use the Manual Dial menu.• or   to Manual Dialand press   to select.• or   to Radio Numberand press   to select.• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number:. Thesecond line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Usethe keypad to enter the sub-scriber alias or ID and press.RadioCon-trolsSteps4 or   to Radio Disable andpress   to select.The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.If not successful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.Do not press   during the Radio Disableoperation as you will not get an acknowledgementmessage.Radio Enable1Access this feature byAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode135English
RadioCon-trolsStepsRadioEnablebutton1Press the programmed Radio Ena-ble button.2 or   to the required alias or IDand press   to select.Radiomenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-phabetically sorted.3Use one of the steps described nextto select the required subscriberalias or ID• Select the required alias or ID di-rectly.RadioCon-trolsSteps• or   to the requiredalias or ID and press   toselect.•Use the Manual Dial menu.• or   to Manual Dialand press   to select.• or   to Radio Numberand press   to select.• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number:. Thesecond line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Usethe keypad to enter the sub-scriber alias or ID and press.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode136English
RadioCon-trolsSteps4 or   to Radio Enable andpress   to select.The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicatortone and the display shows positive mini notice.If not successful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone and the display shows negative mininotice.Do not press   during the Radio Enableoperation as you will not get an acknowledgementmessage.Lone WorkerThis feature raises an emergency if there is no useractivity, such as any radio button press or activationof the channel selector, for a predefined time.Before raising the emergency, when the inactivitytimer expires, the radio warns the user via an audioindicator.If there is still no acknowledgement by the userbefore the predefined reminder timer expires, theradio initiates an Emergency Alarm.Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can beassigned to this feature:• Emergency Alarm• Emergency Alarm with Call•Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state allowingvoice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 103 on ways to exitEmergency.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode137English
Note:This feature is limited to radios with thisfunction enabled. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator for more information.Password Lock FeaturesIf enabled, this feature only allows you access yourradio if the correct password is entered uponpowering up.Accessing the Radio from Password1Power up your radio.You hear a continuous tone.2Do one of the following: Enter your current four-digit password. Press or   to edit each digit’snumeric value. Each digit changes to  . Press to move to next digit. Press   to confirm yourselection.• Enter your current four-digit password with theradio’s keypad. The second line of the displayshows  . Press   to proceed.• Enter your current four-digit password. Press or   to edit each digit’s numeric value.Each digit changes to  . Press   to move tonext digit. Press   to confirm your selection.You hear a positive indicator tone for every digitentered. Press   to remove the last   on thedisplay. You hear a negative indicator tone, if youpress   when the second line of the display isempty, or if you press more than four digits.If the password is correct, your radio proceeds topower up. See Powering Up the Radio on page27.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.After the third incorrect password, the displayshows Wrong Password and then, shows RadioLocked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinksyellow.Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes,and responds to inputs from On/Off/VolumeAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode138English
Control Knob and programmed Backlight buttononly.Note:The radio is unable to receive any call,including emergency calls, in locked state.Unlocking the Radio from Locked State1If your radio was powered down after being in thelocked state, power up the radio.A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.The display shows Radio Locked.2Wait for 15 minutes.Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for lockedstate when you power up.3Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 138.Turning the Password Lock On or Off1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Passwd Lock and press   toselect.5Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 138.6Press   to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.7If the password entered in the previous step iscorrect, press   to enable/disable passwordlock.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode139English
Changing the Password1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Passwd Lock and press   toselect.5Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 138.6Press   to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.7If the password entered in the previous step iscorrect,   or   to Change Pwd and press to select.8Enter a new four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 138.9Reenter the previously entered four-digitpassword. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 138.10Press   to proceed.If the reentered password matches the newpassword entered earlier, the display showsPassword Changed.If the reentered password does NOT match thenew password entered earlier, the display showsPasswords Do Not Match.The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode140English
Bluetooth OperationNote:If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-relatedfeatures are disabled and the Bluetooth devicedatabase is erased.This feature allows you to use your radio with aBluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wirelessBluetooth connection. Your radio supports bothMotorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed pathbetween your radio and your Bluetooth-enableddevice.It is not recommended that you leave your radiobehind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device towork with a high degree of reliability when they areseparated.At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tonequality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. Tocorrect this problem, simply position your radio andBluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (withinthe 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establishclear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth functionhas a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range.Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneousBluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enableddevices of unique types. For example, a headset, ascanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multipleconnections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of thesame type are not supported.Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full capabilities.Turning Bluetooth On and Off1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to My Status and press   to select.The display shows On and Off. The current statusis indicated by a  .4Do one of the following:Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode141English
• or   to On and press   to select. Thedisplay shows On and a   appears left of theselected status.• or   to Off and press   to select. Thedisplay shows Off and a   appears left of theselected status.Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth DeviceDo not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device orpress   during the finding and connectingoperation as this cancels the operation.1Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and placeit in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.2On your radio, press   to access the menu.3 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.4 or   to Devices and press   to select.5Do one of the following:• or   to the required device and press to select.• or   to Find Devices to locate availabledevices.  or   to the required device andpress   to select.6 or   to Connect and press   to select.Display shows Connecting to <Device>. YourBluetooth-enabled device may require additionalsteps to complete the pairing. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.If successful, the radio display shows <Device>Connected. A tone sounds and   appears besidesthe connected device. The Bluetooth Connected iconappears on the status bar.If unsuccessful, the radio display shows ConnectingFailed.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode142English
Note:If pin code is required, use the same entrymethod as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 138.Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode)Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during thefinding and connecting operation as this may cancelthe operation.1Turn Bluetooth On.See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 141.2 to access the menu.3 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.4 or   to Find Me and press   to select.Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. Thisis called Discoverable Mode.5Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair itwith your radio.Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual.Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device1On your radio, press   to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.4 or   to the required device and press to select.5 or   to Disconnect and press   toselect.Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.Your Bluetooth-enabled device may requireadditional steps to disconnect. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode143English
The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. Apositive indicator tone sounds and   disappearsbeside the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon disappears on the status bar.Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speakerand Bluetooth DeviceYou can toggle audio routing between internal radiospeaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switchbutton.•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Radio.•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Bluetooth.Viewing Device Details1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.4 or   to the required device and press to select.5 or   to View Details and press   toselect.Editing Device NameYou can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enableddevices.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.4 or   to the required device and press to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode144English
5 or   to Edit Name and press   to select.6Press   to move one space to the left. Press   tomove one space to the right. Press   to deleteany unwanted characters. Long press   tochange text entry method.A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to typethe required zone.7The display shows Device Name Saved.Deleting Device NameYou can remove a disconnected device from the listof Bluetooth-enabled devices.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.4 or   to the required device and press to select.5 or   to Delete and press   to select.The display shows Device Deleted.Bluetooth Mic GainAllows control of the connected Bluetooth-enableddevice’s microphone gain value.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to BT Mic Gain and press   toselect.4 or   to the BT Mic Gain type and the currentvalues.To edit values, press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode145English
5 or   to increase or to decrease values andpress   to select.Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable ModeNote:The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Modecan only be enabled via the MOTOTRBOCPS. If enabled, the Bluetooth item will notbe displayed in the Menu and you will not beable to use any Bluetooth programmablebutton features.Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate yourradio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. Itenables dedicated devices to use your radio positionin the process of Bluetooth-based location.Notification ListYour radio has a Notification List that collects all your“unread” events on the channel, such as unread textmessages, telemetry messages and missed calls.Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notificationlist.The Notification icon appears on the status bar whenthe Notification List has one or more events.For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events,the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missedcalls/call alerts. This maximum number depends onindividual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/call alerts) list capability.Note:After the events are read, they are removedfrom the Notification List.Accessing the Notification List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Notification and press   toselect.3 or   to the required event and press   toselect.Long press  to return to the Home Screen.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode146English
Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to informyou when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios.ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signalsperiodically to confirm that they are within range ofeach other. Your dealer can program your radio totransmit or receive the ARTS signal.Your radio provides indications of states as follows:•First-Time Alert – A tone sounds and the displayshows In Range after the channel alias.•ARTS-in-Range Alert – A tone sounds, ifprogrammed, and the display shows In Rangeafter the channel alias.•ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert – A tone sounds, theLED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternatesbetween Out of Range and the home screen.Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP)Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely,via OTAP, without needing to be physicallyconnected. Additionally, some settings can also beconfigured via OTAP.While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green.Note:When the radio is receiving high volume data,the High Volume Data icon appears andchannel is busy. A PTT button press at thistime may cause a negative tone to sound.Once the programming is complete, depending onyour radio’s configuration:•A tone sounds, the display shows UpdatingRestarting, and your radio restarts (powers offand on again).•Select between Restart Now or Postpone.Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return tothe previous display, with an OTAP Timer iconvisible, for a period of time before the automaticrestart occurs.Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, thedisplay shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAPupdate is successful or Sw Update Failed if theOTAP update is unsuccessful.See Software Update on page 184 for your updatedsoftware version.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode147English
Wi-Fi OperationWi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.Note:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-Fi® network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radiofirmware, codeplug, and resources such as languagepacks and voice announcement.Turning Wi-Fi On or OffNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button isassigned via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi® by performing oneof the following actions.•Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi orTurning Off Wi-Fi.•Access this feature via the menu.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to WiFi and press   toselect.c) Press   or   to WiFi Status and press to select.Press   to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled.Press   to turn off Wi-Fi. The   disappearsfrom beside Enabled.Connecting to a Network Access PointNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode148English
When you turn on Wi-Fi®, the radio scans andconnects to a network access point.You can also connect to a network access point viathe menu.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to a network access point andpress   to select.5Press   or   to Connect and press   toselect.6Enter the password and press  .When the connection is successful, the radiodisplays a notice and the network access point issaved into the profile list.Refreshing the Network ListNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.•Perform the following actions to refresh thenetwork list.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to WiFi and press   toselect.c)Press   or   to Networks and press to select.When you enter the Networks menu, the radioautomatically refreshes the network list.•If you are already in the Networks menu, performthe following action to refresh the network list.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode149English
a)Press   or   to Refresh and press   toselect.The radio refreshes and displays the latestnetwork list.Adding a NetworkNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.If a preferred network is not in the available networklist, perform the following actions to add a network.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to Add Network and press to select.5Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press.6Press   or   to Open and press   to select.7Enter the password and press  .The radio displays   to indicate that thenetwork is successfully saved.Viewing Details of Network Access PointsNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.Perform the following actions to view details ofnetwork access points.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode150English
3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to a network access point andpress   to select.5Press   or   to View Details and press to select.For a connected network access point, the ServiceSet Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, MediaAccess Control (MAC) address, and InternetProtocol (IP) address are displayed.For a non-connected network access point, theService Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Modeare displayed.Removing Network Access PointsNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only. Enterprise network access pointsthat are added via CPS can only be removedvia CPS.Perform the following actions to remove networkaccess points from the profile list.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to the selected network accesspoint and press   to select.5Press   or   to Remove and press   toselect.6Press   or   to Yes and press   to select.The radio displays   to indicate that theselected network access point is successfullyremoved.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode151English
UtilitiesLocking and Unlocking the KeypadYou can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertentkey entry.To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.Option StepsLockingthe Key-pad1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settingsand press   to select.4 or   to Keypad Lock andpress   to select.You can also use or to change theselected option.Option StepsUnlockingthe Key-padPress   followed by  .After the keypad is locked, the display showsKeypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.After the keypad is unlocked, the display showsKeypad Unlocked and returns to the Homescreen.Turning Keypad Tones On or OffYou can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode152English
4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Keypad Tones and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable keypad tones.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Setting the Squelch LevelYou can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter outunwanted calls with low signal strength or channelsthat have a higher than normal background noise.Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)calls and/or background noise; however, calls fromremote locations may also be filtered out.Note:This feature is not applicable in Citizens Bandchannels that are in the same frequency.Press the programmed Squelch button to togglesquelch level between normal and tight. Follow theprocedure described next to access this feature viathe radio’s menus.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Squelch and press   to select.5 or   to the required setting and press to select. appears besides selected setting. Screenreturns to the previous menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode153English
Setting the Power LevelNote:This feature is not applicable in Citizens Bandchannels that are in the same frequency.You can customize the power setting of the radio tohigh or low for each channel.High enables communication with radios located at aconsiderable distance from you. Low enablescommunication with radios in closer proximity.Press the programmed Power Level button to toggletransmit power level between high and low. Followthe procedure described next to access this featurevia the radio menu.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to Utilities and press   toselect.3Press   or   to Radio Settings and press to select.4Press   or   to Power and press   toselect.5Press   or   to the required setting and press to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time,long press   to return to the Home screen.Screen returns to the previous menu.Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or OffA channel can support up to 6 option board features.Refer to your dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.Press the programmed Option Board Featurebutton to toggle the feature on or off.Identifying Cable TypeYou can select the type of cable your radio uses.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode154English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Cable Type and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5The current cable type is indicated by a  .Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)Feature On or OffThis feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voiceactivated call on a programmed channel. The radioautomatically transmits, for a programmed period,whenever the microphone on the VOX-capableaccessory detects voice.Note:This feature is not applicable in Citizens Bandchannels that are in the same frequency.Pressing the PTT button during radio operation willdisable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of thefollowing:•Turn the radio off and power it on again.• Change the channel via the Channel SelectorKnob.•Press the programmed VOX button to toggle thefeature on or off.• Follow the steps described next to access thisfeature via the radio menu.If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page158), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait forthe Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearlyinto the microphone.Note:Turning this feature on or off is limited toradios with this function enabled. Check withyour dealer or system administrator for moreinformation.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode155English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to VOX and press   to select.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5Press   to disable/enable VOX.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Setting the Display Backlight TimerYou can set the the radio’s display backlight timer asneeded. The setting also affects the Menu NavigationButtons and keypad backlighting accordingly.Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle thebacklight settings, or follow the procedure describednext to access this feature via the radio menu.The display backlight and keypad backlighting areautomatically turned off if the LED indicator isdisabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off onpage 162).1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.5 or   to Backlight Timer and press   toselect.You can use   or   to change the selectedoption.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode156English
Turning the Backlight Auto On or OffYou can enable and disable the radio’s backlight toturn on automatically if needed. If enabled, thebacklight is turned on when the radio receives a call,Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Backlight Auto.5Press   to enable/disable the Backlight Auto.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or OffYou can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) ifneeded.Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button totoggle all tones on or off, or follow the proceduredescribed next to access this feature via the radiomenu.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to All Tones and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode157English
6Press   to enable/disable all tones and alerts.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset LevelYou can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level ifneeded. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voicevolume.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Vol. Offset and press   toselect.6 or   to the required volume value.The radio sounds a feedback tone with eachcorresponding volume value.7Do one of the following:•Press   to keep the required displayedvolume value.•Press   to exit without changing the currentvolume offset settings.Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or OffYou can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone ifneeded.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode158English
3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Talk Permit and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable the Talk PermitTone.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or OffYou can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Toneif needed.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Power Up and press   to select.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable the Power Up AlertTone.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode159English
Setting the Text Message Alert ToneYou can customize your radio’s text message alerttone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in theContacts list.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.3 or   to the required subscriber alias or IDand press   to select.4 or   to Message Alert and press   toselect.The display shows Momentary and Repetitive.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5 or   to the required setting and press  toenable. appears besides selected setting.Changing the Display ModeYou can change radio’s display mode between Dayor Night, as needed. This affects the color palette ofthe display.Change the Display Mode:RadioControlStepsPro-gram-medDisplayModeButtonPress the programmed Display Modebutton.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press to select.3 or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode160English
RadioControlSteps4 or   to Display and press to select.The display shows Day Mode andNight Mode.Note:You can also use   or   tochange the selected option.5 or   to the required settingand press   to enable.   ap-pears besides selected setting.Adjusting the Display BrightnessYou can adjust the display brightness of the radio asneeded.Note:Display brightness cannot be adjusted whenAuto Brightness is enabled.Adjust the Display Brightness by performing one ofthe following actions:RadioControlStepsProgram-med Dis-playBright-nessButton1Press the programmed Bright-ness button.2Decrease display brightness bypressing   or increase the displaybrightness by pressing  . Selectfrom setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press to select.3 or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode161English
RadioControlSteps4 or   to Brightness andpress   to select.The display shows a progress bar.5Decrease display brightness bypressing   or increase the displaybrightness by pressing  . Selectfrom setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry.LanguageYou can set your radio display to be in your requiredlanguage.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Languages and press   to select.You can also use   or   to change selectedoption.5 or   to the required language and press to enable.   appears beside selectedlanguage.Turning the LED Indicator On or OffYou can enable and disable the LED Indicator ifneeded.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode162English
3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to LED Indicator and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5Press   to enable/disable the LED Indicator.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Turning the Introduction Screen On or OffYou can enable and disable the Introduction Screen ifneeded.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.5 or   to Intro Screen and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable the IntroductionScreen.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Turning the Voice Announcement On or OffNote:The Voice Announcement feature can only beenabled via the MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled,the Text-to-Speech feature is automaticallydisabled, and vice versa.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode163English
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thecurrent Zone or Channel the user has assigned, orprogrammable button press. This audio indicator canbe customized per customer requirements. This istypically useful when the user is in a difficult conditionto read the content shown on the display.Toggle Voice Announcement On or Off.RadioControlStepsProgram-med VoiceAn-nounce-ment But-tonPress the programmed Voice An-nouncement button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settingsand press   to select.RadioControlSteps4 or   to Voice Announce‐ment and press   to select.Note:You can also use   or to change the selectedoption.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable VoiceAnnouncement. The displayshows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable VoiceAnnouncement. The   disap-pears from beside Enabled.Setting the Text-to-Speech FeatureNote:The Text-to-Speech feature can only beenabled via the MOTOTRBO CustomerAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode164English
Programming Software. If enabled, the VoiceAnnouncement feature is automaticallydisabled, and vice versa. Check with yourdealer or system administrator for moreinformation.This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thefollowing features:• Current Channel• Current Zone•Programmed button feature on or off• Content of received text messages• Content of received Job TicketsThis audio indicator can be customized per customerrequirements. This is typically useful when the user isin a difficult condition to read the content shown onthe display.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Voice Announcement and press to select.5 or   to any of the following features andpress   to select.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.•All•Messages•Job Tickets•Channel•Zone•Program Button appears beside the selected setting.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode165English
Call Forwarding You can enable your radio to automatically forwardvoice calls to another radio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Call Forward and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.4Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Call Forwarding. Thedisplay shows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Call Forwarding. The disappears from beside Enabled.Menu TimerSet the period of time your radio stays in the menubefore it automatically switches to the Home screen.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.5 or   to Menu Timer and press   toselect.6 or   to the required setting and press to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode166English
Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A)This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on an analog system.It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.4 or   to Mic AGC-A and press   to select.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Mic AGC-A. The displayshows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Mic AGC-A. The disappears from beside Enabled.Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on a digital system. Itsuppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.4 or   to Mic AGC-D and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode167English
5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Mic AGC-D. The displayshows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Mic AGC-D. The disappears from beside Enabled.Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speakerand Wired AccessoryYou can toggle audio routing between the internalradio speaker and the speaker of wired accessoryprovided that:• The wired accessory with speaker is attached.• The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.Powering down the radio or detaching the accessoryresets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker.Press the programmed Audio Toggle button totoggle audio routing between the internal radiospeaker and the speaker of wired accessory.Intelligent AudioYour radio can automatically adjust its audio volumeto overcome background noise in the environment,inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noisesources. This feature is a Receive-only feature anddoes not affect Transmit audio.Note:This feature is not applicable during aBluetooth session.Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off.RadioControlStepsPro-gram-med In-telligentAudioButtonPress the programmed Intelligent Au-dio button.Menu 1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode168English
RadioControlSteps2 or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.4 or   to Intelligent Audioand press   to select.Note:You can also use   or   tochange the selected option.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable IntelligentAudio. The display shows   be-side Enabled.RadioControlSteps•Press   to disable IntelligentAudio. The   disappears frombeside Enabled.See Authorized Accessories List on page 307 forrecommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessorieswith in-built Automatic Volume Control for similarperformance.Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature Onor Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedbackin received calls.Toggle the Acoustic Feedback SuppressorFeature On or Off by performing one of thefollowing actions:RadioControlStepsProgram-med Press the programmed AcousticFeedback Suppressor button.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode169English
RadioControlStepsAcousticFeedbackSuppres-sor But-tonMenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settingsand press   to select.4 or   to AF Suppressor andpress   to select.Note:You can also use   or to change the selected op-tion.RadioControlSteps5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable AcousticFeedback Suppressor. Thedisplay shows   beside Ena-bled.•Press   to disable AcousticFeedback Suppressor. The disappears from beside Ena-bled.Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion ControlFeature On or OffThis feature allows you to enable the radio toautomatically monitor the microphone input andadjust the microphone gain value to avoid audioclipping.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode170English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.4 or   to Mic Distortion and press   toselect.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The display shows   besideEnabled.•Press   to disable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The   disappears frombeside Enabled.Setting the Audio AmbienceYou can customize the audio ambience of the radioaccording to your environment.Default enables the default factory settings.Loud enables Noise Suppressor and increasesspeaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings.Work Group enables AF Suppressor and disablesAGC for use when a group of radios are near to eachother.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Audio Ambience and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode171English
5 or   to the required setting and press to select.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption. appears beside the selected setting.Screen returns to the previous menu.Setting the Audio ProfilesYou can customize the audio profiles of the radioaccording to your preference.Default disables the previously selected audioprofile and the radio’s audio profile returns to normal.Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are audio profilesintended to compensate for noise-induced hearingloss that is typical for adults in their 40’s, 50’s, and60’s or over.Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost are fora tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deepersound.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Audio Profiles and press   toselect.5 or   to the required setting and press to select.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption. appears beside the selected setting.Screen returns to the previous menu.Turning GPS/GNSS On or OffGlobal Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is asatellite navigation system that determines the radio’sprecise location. GNSS includes Global PositioningSystem (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite SystemAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode172English
(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System(BDS).Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to togglethe feature on or off.Note:Selected radio models may offer GPS,GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation isconfigured via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to Utilities and press   toselect.3Press   or   to Radio Settings and press to select.4Press   or   to GPS and press   to select.5Press   to enable/disable GPS/GNSS.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page184 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information.Text Entry ConfigurationYou can configure the following settings for enteringtext on your radio:• Word Predict• Word Correct• Sentence Cap• My WordsYour radio supports the following text entry methods:• Numbers• Symbols• Predictive or Multi-Tap• Language (If programmed)Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode173English
Note:Press   at any time to return to theprevious screen or long press   to return tothe Home Screen. The radio exits the currentscreen once the inactivity timer expires.Word PredictYour radio can learn common word sequences thatyou often enter. It then predicts the next word youmay want to use after you enter the first word of acommon word sequence into the text editor.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to Word Predict and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Word Predict. The displayshows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Word Predict. The disappears from beside Enabled.Sentence CapAutomatically enables capitalization for the first letterin the first word for every new sentence.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode174English
3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to Sentence Cap and press   toselect.6Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Sentence Cap. Thedisplay shows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Sentence Cap. The disappears from beside Enabled.Viewing Custom WordsYou can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list tocontain these words.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to List of Words and press   toselect.Display shows the list of custom words.Editing Custom WordYou can edit the custom words saved in your radio.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode175English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to List of Words and press   toselect.Display shows the list of custom words.7 or   to the required word and press   toselect.8 or   to Edit and press   to select.9Use the keypad to edit your custom word.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod. Press   once your custom word iscompleted.The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.Adding Custom WordYou can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode176English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to Add New Word and press   toselect.Display shows the list of custom words.7Use the keypad to edit your custom word.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod. Press   once your custom word iscompleted.The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.Deleting a Custom WordYou can delete the custom words saved in your radio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode177English
4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to the required word and press   toselect.7 or   to Delete and press   to select.8Choose one of the following.•At Delete Entry?, press   to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious screen.Deleting All Custom WordsYou can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-built.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to Delete All and press   toselect.7Choose one of the following.•At Delete Entry?, press   to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode178English
• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious screen.Flexible Receive ListFlexible Receive List is a digital-only (currentlysupported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus)feature that allows you to add, delete or edit memberson the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support amaximum of 16 members in the list.Turning the Flexible Receive List On or OffYou can enable and disable the Flexible Receive Listif needed.Enable the Flexible Receive List by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolStepsProgrammedFlexible Re-ceive ListButtonPress the programmed FlexibleReceive List button.Radio Con-trolStepsMenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Flexible RxList and press   to select.3Press   to enable or disablethe Flexible Receive List fea-ture.PreviousdisplayCurrent displayTurn On Flexible Rx List OnTurn Off Flexible Rx List OffAdding a New Entry to the Flexible Receive List1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode179English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Flexible Rx List and press to select.5 or   to View/Edit List and press   toselect.6 or   to Add Member and press   toselect.7Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControlStepsRadioNaviga- or   to the required alias or ID.RadioControlStepstion But-tonsKeypad Key in the first character of the re-quired alias.A blinking cursor appears.Press   to move one space to the left.Press   to move one space to theright. Press the   key to deleteany unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method.The first line of the display shows thecharacters you keyed in. The nextlines of the display show the short list-ed search results. The alias search iscase-insensitive. If there are two ormore aliases with the same name, theradio displays the alias that is listedfirst in the list.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode180English
8Press   to select.The display shows Add Another?.9 or   to No and press   to selectThe display shows  .Deleting an Entry from the Flexible Receive List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Flexible Rx List and press to select.5 or   to View/Edit List and press   toselect.6Select the required alias or ID by performing oneof the following actions:RadioControlStepsRadioNaviga-tion But-tons or   to the required alias or ID.Keypad Key in the first character of the re-quired alias.A blinking cursor appears.Press   to move one space to the left.Press   to move one space to theright. Press the   key to deleteany unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method.The first line of the display shows thecharacters you keyed in. The nextlines of the display show the short list-ed search results. The alias search isAdvanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode181English
RadioControlStepscase-insensitive. If there are two ormore aliases with the same name, theradio displays the alias that is listedfirst in the list.7Press   to select.8 or   to Delete and press   to select.9 or   to Yes and press   to select.The display shows  .Accessing General Radio InformationYour radio contains information on the following:• Battery• Radio Alias and ID•Firmware and Codeplug Versions• GPS Information• Software Update• Site InformationPress   at any time to return to the previousscreen or long press   to return to the Homescreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.Accessing the Battery InformationDisplays information on your radio battery.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Battery Info and press   toselect.The display shows the battery information.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode182English
For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display readsRecondition Battery if the battery requiresreconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After thereconditioning process, the display then shows thebattery information.Checking the Radio Alias and IDThis feature displays the ID of your radio.Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button tocheck your radio alias and ID. You hear a positiveindicator tone.Follow the procedure described next to access thisfeature via the radio screen.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to My ID and press   to select.The first line of the display shows the radio alias.The second line of the display shows the radio ID.You can also press the programmed Radio Alias andID button to return to the previous screen.Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersionDisplays the firmware version on your radio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Versions and press   to select.The display shows the current firmware andcodeplug versions.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode183English
Checking the GPS/GNSS InformationDisplays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio,such as values of:• Latitude• Longitude•Altitude• Direction• Velocity• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)• Satellites• Version1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to GPS Info and press   to select.5 or   to the required item and press   toselect.The display shows the requested GPS/GNSSinformation.See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 172 fordetails on GPS/GNSS.Software UpdateDisplays the date and time of the latest softwareupdate carried out via Over-the-Air Programming.Note:Software Update menu is only available afterat least one successful OTAP session.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode184English
4 or   to SW Update and press   to select.The display shows the date and time of the latestsoftware update.See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 147for details on OTAP session.Site InformationDisplays the current Linked Capacity Plus site nameyour radio is on.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Site Info and press   to select.The display shows the current Linked CapacityPlus site name.See Linked Capacity Plus on page 48 for details onLinked Capacity Plus.Front Panel Configuration (FPC)Your radio is able to customize certain featureparameters to enhance the use of your radio.Entering FPC Mode1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Program Radio and press   toselect.Long press   at any time to return to the Homescreen.Editing FPC Mode ParametersUse the following buttons as required while navigatingthrough the feature parameters:Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode185English
•,   – Scroll through options, increase/decrease values, or navigate vertically.• – Select the option or enter a sub-menu.• – Short-press to return to previous menu orto exit the selection screen. Long-press to returnto Home screen.Checking the RSSI ValuesYour radio shows the Received Signal StrengthIndicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. Thisfeature allows you to view the RSSI values.On the home screen, press   three times andimmediately press  , all within 5 seconds.The display shows current RSSI values. Longpress the   to return to the Home Screen.See Display Icons on page 39 for details on RSSIicon.Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode186English
Connect Plus OperationsConnect Plus Operations187English
Additional Radio Controls in ConnectPlus ModePush-To-Talk (PTT) ButtonThe PTT button on the side of the radio ( ) servestwo basic purposes:A• While a call is in progress, the PTT button allowsthe radio to transmit to other radios in the call.Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release thePTT button to listen.The microphone is activated when the PTT buttonis pressed.• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button isused to make a new call (see Making a Radio Callon page 203).If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk PermitTone On or Off on page 158) is enabled, wait until theshort alert tone ends before talking.Programmable ButtonsYour dealer can program the programmable buttonsas shortcuts to radio functions depending on theduration of a button press:Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly.Long press Pressing and holding for theprogrammed duration.Press and hold Keeping the button pressed.Note:The programmed duration of a button press isapplicable for all assignable radio/utilityfunctions or settings. See EmergencyOperation on page 232 for more informationon the programmed duration of theEmergency button.Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode188English
Assignable Radio FunctionsBeacon On/Off Toggles the Beacon feature onor off. Requires purchase ofConnect Plus Man Downfeature.Beacon Reset Resets (cancels) the Beacontone, but it does not turn theBeacon feature off. Requirespurchase of Connect Plus ManDown feature.Bluetooth® AudioSwitchToggles audio routing betweeninternal radio speaker andexternal Bluetooth-enabledaccessory.Busy QueueCancellationExits the busy mode when anon-Emergency call in theBusy Queue was initiated.Emergency calls, onceaccepted into the Busy Queue,cannot be cancelled.Call Log Selects the call log list.Contacts Provides direct access to theContacts list.Emergency On/Off Depending on theprogramming, initiates orcancels an emergency.Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on oroff.Man Down AlarmsOn/OffToggles all configured ManDown Alarms on or off.Requires purchase of ConnectPlus Man Down feature.Man Down AlarmsResetIf pressed while a Man Downfeature Alert Tone is playing,the tone is cancelled andfeature timers are reset, but itdoes not turn the Man DownAlarms off. Requires purchaseof Man Down feature.Manual Dial Depending on theprogramming, initiates aPrivate or Phone Call bykeying in any subscriber ID orphone number.One TouchAccessDirectly initiates a predefinedPrivate Call, a Call Alert or aQuick Text message.Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode189English
Privacy Toggles privacy on or off.Radio Check Determines if a radio is activein a system.Radio Enable Allows a target radio to beremotely enabled.Radio Disable Allows a target radio to beremotely disabled.Remote Monitor Turns on the microphone of atarget radio without it givingany indicators.Roam Request Requests to search for adifferent site.Scan Toggles scan on or off.Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radiosearches the current site only.When toggled off, the radiosearches other sites in additionto the current site.Text Message Selects the text messagemenu.VoiceAnnouncement forChannelPlays zone and channelannouncement voicemessages for the currentchannel. This function isunavailable when VoiceAnnouncement is disabled.VoiceAnnouncementOn/OffToggles voice announcementon or off.Zone Allows selection from a list ofzones.Assignable Settings or Utility FunctionsAF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic FeedbackSuppressor feature on or off.All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts onor off.Backlight Toggles display backlight on oroff.BacklightBrightnessAdjusts the brightness level.Display Mode Toggles the day/night displaymode on or off.Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode190English
GlobalPositioningSystem (GPS)Toggles the satellite navigationsystem on or off.Keypad Lock Toggles keypad betweenlocked and unlocked.Power Level Toggles transmit power levelbetween high and low.Unassigned Indicates that the buttonfunction has not yet beenassigned.Identifying Status Indicators in Connect PlusModeDisplay IconsThe 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries,and menu entries.The following are icons that appear on the display ofthe radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar,arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage andare channel specific.Received Signal Strength Indicator(RSSI)The number of bars displayed repre-sents the radio signal strength. Fourbars indicate the strongest signal. Thisicon is only displayed while receiving.BluetoothThe Bluetooth feature is enabled butthere is no remote Bluetooth device con-nected.Bluetooth ConnectedThe Bluetooth feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a remote Bluetoothdevice is connected.Notification List has items to review. or  Power LevelRadio is set at Low power or Radio isset at High power.Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode191English
Tones DisableTones are turned off.Option BoardThe Option Board is enabled.Option Board Non-FunctionThe Option Board is disabled.GPS/GNSS AvailableThe GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. Theicon stays lit when a position fix is avail-able.GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out ofRangeThe GPS/GNSS feature is enabled butis not receiving data from the satellite.ScanScan feature is enabled.EmergencyRadio is in Emergency mode.SecureThe Privacy feature is enabled.UnsecureThe Privacy feature is disabled.Site RoamingThe site roaming feature is enabled.BatteryThe number of bars (0 – 4) shown indi-cates the charge remaining in the bat-tery. Blinks when the battery is low.Wi-Fi Excellent[6]Wi-Fi signal is excellent.Wi-Fi Good[6]Wi-Fi signal is good.Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode192English
Wi-Fi Average[6]Wi-Fi signal is average.Wi-Fi Poor[6]Wi-Fi signal is poor.Wi-Fi Unavailable[6]Wi-Fi signal is unavailable.Call IconsThe following icons appear on the radio’s displayduring a call. These icons also appear in the Contactslist to indicate ID type.Private CallIndicates a Private Call in progress. Inthe Contacts list, it indicates a sub-scriber alias (name) or ID (number).Group Call/Site All CallIndicates a Group Call or Site All Callin progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-cates a group alias (name) or ID(number).Phone Call as Private CallIndicates a Phone Call as Private Callin progress.Dispatch CallThe Dispatch Call contact type is usedto send a text message to a dispatch-er PC through a third-party Text Mes-sage Server.Advanced Menu IconsThe following icons appear beside menu items thatoffer a choice between two options or as an indicationthat there is a sub-menu offering two options.6Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580eAdditional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode193English
Checkbox (Empty)Indicates the option is not selected.Checkbox (Checked)Indicates the option is selected.Solid Black BoxIndicates the option selected for the menuitem with a sub-menu.Sent Item IconsThe following icons appear at the top right corner ofthe radio’s display in the Sent Items folder.ORSent SuccessfullyThe text message is sent successfully.ORIn-Progress• The text message to a group alias or IDis pending transmission.• The text message to a subscriber aliasor ID is pending transmission, followedby waiting for acknowledgement.Bluetooth Device IconsThe following icons also appear next to items in thelist of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicatethe device type.Bluetooth Data DeviceBluetooth-enabled data device, suchas a scanner.Bluetooth Audio DeviceBluetooth-enabled audio device,such as a headset.Bluetooth PTT DeviceAdditional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode194English
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, suchas a PTT-Only Device (POD).LED IndicatorThe LED indicator ( ) shows the operational status ofyour radio.ABlinking red Battery mismatch occurs or radio istransmitting at low battery condition,receiving an emergency transmis-sion or has failed the self-test uponpowering up, or has moved out ofrange if radio is configured with Au-to-Range Transponder System.Rapidlyblinking redRadio is receiving over-the-air filetransfer (Option Board firmware file,Network Frequency file or OptionBoard Codeplug file) or upgrading toa new Option Board firmware file.Blinkinggreen andyellowRadio is receiving a Call Alert, re-ceived a text message or Scan is en-abled and is receiving activity.Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth DiscoverableMode.Doubleblinking yel-lowRadio is actively searching for a newsite.Blinking yel-lowRadio is receiving a Call Alert orScan is enabled and is idle (radio willremain muted to any activity).Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting.BlinkinggreenRadio is powering up, receiving anon-privacy- enabled call or data.Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode195English
DoubleblinkinggreenRadio is receiving a privacy-enabledcall.Indicator TonesHigh pitched tone Low pitched tonePositive Indicator ToneNegative Indicator ToneAlert TonesAlert tones provide you with audible indications of thestatus, or response to data received on the radio.Continuous Tone A monotone sound.Sounds continuously un-til termination.Periodic Tone Sounds periodically de-pending on the durationset by the radio. Tonestarts, stops, and repeatsitself.Repetitive Tone A single tone that re-peats itself until it is ter-minated by the user.Momentary Tone Sounds only once for ashort period of time de-fined by the radio.Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus ModesTo switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you mustchange to another zone, if programmed by yourdealer or system administrator. Check with yourdealer or system administrator to see if your radio hasbeen programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, andwhat features are available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones.Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode196English
Making and Receiving Calls in ConnectPlus ModeSelecting a SiteA site provides coverage for a specific area. AConnect Plus site has a site controller and amaximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, theConnect Plus radio will automatically search for a newsite when the signal level from the current site dropsto an unacceptable level.Roam RequestA Roam Request tells the radio to search for adifferent site, even if the signal from the current site isacceptable.If there are no sites available,•The radio display shows Searching andcontinues to search through the list of sites.• The radio will return to the previous site, if theprevious site is still available.Note:This is programmed by your dealer.Press the programmed Roam Request button.You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switchedto a new site. The display shows Site ID <SiteNumber>.Site Lock On/OffWhen toggled on, the radio searches the current siteonly. When toggled off, the radio searches other sitesin addition to the current site.Press the programmed Site Lock button.• You hear a positive indicator tone, indicatingthe radio has locked to the current site. Thedisplay shows Site Locked.•You hear a negative indicator tone, indicatingthe radio is unlocked. The display shows SiteUnlocked.Site RestrictionYour Connect Plus radio system administrator has theability to decide which network sites your radio is andis not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to bereprogrammed to change the list of allowed anddisallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at adisallowed site, you see a brief message stating:Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode197English
Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radiothen searches for a different network site.Selecting a ZoneThe radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zonecontains a maximum of 16 assignable positions onthe Channel Selector Knob.Each assignable knob position can be used to startone of the following voice call types:• Group Call• Multigroup Call• Site All Call• Private Call1Access the Zone feature by performing one of thefollowing actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedZone buttonPress the programmed Zonebutton.Radio Con-trolsStepsRadio menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Zone and press to select.The current zone is displayed and indicated by a.2Select the required zone.Radio Control Steps or   or   and scroll to the re-quired zone.3Press   to select.The display shows <Zone> Selectedmomentarily and returns to the selected zonescreen.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode198English
Using Multiple NetworksIf your radio has been programmed to use multipleConnect Plus networks, you can select a differentnetwork by switching to the Connect Plus zone that isassigned to the desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are configured by your dealerthrough radio programming.Selecting a Call TypeUse the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type.This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site AllCall or Private Call, depending on how your radio isprogrammed. If you change the Channel SelectorKnob to a different position (that has a call typeassigned to it), this causes the radio to re-registerwith the Connect Plus site. The radio registers withthe Registration Group ID that has been programmedfor the new Channel Selector Knob position call type.If you select a position that has no call type assignedto it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and thedisplay shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does notoperate when selected to an unprogrammed channel,use the Channel Selector Knob to select aprogrammed channel instead.Once the required zone is displayed (if you havemultiple zones in your radio), turn the programmedChannel Selector Knob to select the call type.Receiving and Responding to a Radio CallOnce the channel, subscriber ID or call type isdisplayed, you can proceed to receive and respond tocalls.The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green when the radio isreceiving.Note:The LED lights up solid green while the radiois transmitting and double blinks green whenMaking and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode199English
the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call.To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, yourradio must have the same Privacy Key, ORthe same Key Value and Key ID (programmedby your dealer), as the transmitting radio (theradio you are receiving the call from).Note:See Privacy on page 257 for moreinformation.Receiving and Responding to a Group CallTo receive a call from a group of users, your radiomust be configured as part of that group.When you receive a Group Call (while on the Homescreen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text lineshows the caller alias. The second text line displaysthe group call alias. Your radio unmutes and theincoming call sounds through the radio's speaker.1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.The LED lights up solid green.2Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (ifenabled), and speak clearly into the microphone.3Release the PTT button to listen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.Note:See Making a Group Call on page 203 fordetails on making a Group Call.Receiving and Responding to a Private CallA Private Call is a call from an individual radio toanother individual radio.When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinksgreen. The Private Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Yourradio unmutes and the incoming call sounds throughthe speaker of the radio.1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.2Press the PTT button to respond to the call.The LED lights up solid green.3Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode200English
4Release the PTT button to listen.If there is no voice activity for a predetermined periodof time, the call ends.You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.See Making a Private Call on page 204 for details onmaking a Private Call.Receiving a Site All CallA Site All Call is a call from an individual radio toevery radio on the site. It is used to make importantannouncements requiring the user’s full attention.When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds andthe LED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows the caller alias. The secondtext line displays Site All Call. Your radiounmutes and the incoming call sounds through theradio speaker.Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to theprevious screen before receiving the call. A Site AllCall does not wait for a predetermined period of timebefore ending.You cannot respond to an Site All Call.Note:See Making a Site All Call on page 205 fordetails on making a Site All Call.Note:The radio stops receiving the Site All Call ifyou switch to a different channel whilereceiving the call. During a Site All Call, youwill not be able to use any programmed buttonfunctions until the call ends.Receiving an Inbound Private Phone CallWhen you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, thePhone Call as Private Call icon appears in the topright corner. The first text line shows Phone Call.1Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk.Release the PTT button to listen.2Long press   to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display returns to the Phone Call screen.The display shows Phone Call Ended.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode201English
Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound PhonePrivate CallDuring the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows Phone Call.1Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the button.Press   followed by   within 2 seconds toinsert a pause. The P replaces * and # on thedisplay.The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayshows the entered digits.2Long press   to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display returns to the Phone Call screen.The display shows Phone Call Ended.Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound PhonePrivate CallDuring the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows Phone Call.1Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enterthe digits.The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayshows the Live Dial digits.2Long press   to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display returns to the Phone Call screen.The display shows Phone Call Ended.Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup CallWhen you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call,the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner.The first text line shows Call1.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode202English
Press the PTT button to talk and release it tolisten.Inbound Phone Multi-Group CallWhen you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-GroupCall, the Group Call icon appears in the top rightcorner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call.The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group callsounds through the radio's speaker.Making a Radio CallAfter selecting your channel, you can select asubscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:• The Channel Selector Knob.• A programmed One Touch Access button – TheOne Touch Access feature allows you to make aPrivate Call to a predefined ID easily. This featurecan be assigned to a short or long programmablebutton press. You can ONLY have one IDassigned to a One Touch Access button. Yourradio can have multiple One Touch Accessbuttons programmed.• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page222).• Manual Dial – This method is for Private Calls onlyand is dialed using the keypad (see Making aPrivate Call from Contacts on page 223, and Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButton on page 206).Note:Your radio must have the Privacy featureenabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios withthe same Key Value and Key ID as your radiowill be able to unscramble the transmission.Note:See Privacy on page 257 for moreinformation.Making a Call with the Channel Selector KnobMaking a Group CallTo make a call to a group of users, your radio mustbe configured as part of that group.1Select the channel with the active group alias orID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 199.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode203English
3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows the group call alias.4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.5Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen, the radio unmutes and the responsesounds through the radio’s speaker. You see theGroup Call icon, the group alias or ID, andtransmitting radio alias or ID on your display.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. Radio returns to thescreen you were on prior to initiating the call.Making a Private CallWhile you can receive and/or respond to a PrivateCall initiated by an authorized individual radio, yourradio must be programmed for you to initiate a PrivateCall.You will hear a negative indicator tone, when youmake a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log,One Touch Access button, or the Channel SelectorKnob, if this feature is not enabled.Use the Text Message or Call Alert features tocontact an individual radio. See Text MessageFeatures on page 244 or Call Alert Operation onpage 101 for more information.1Do one of the following.• Select the channel with the active subscriberalias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page199.• Press the programmed One Touch Accessbutton.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears on the top right corner. The first textline shows the target subscriber alias. The secondtext line displays the call status.4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode204English
5Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.Your radio may be programmed to perform a radiopresence check prior to setting up the Private Call. Ifthe target radio is not available, you hear a short toneand see negative mini notice on the display.Making a Site All CallThis feature allows you to transmit to all users on thesite that are currently not engaged in another call.Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an SiteAll Call.1Select the channel with the active Site All Callgroup alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page199.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Group Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textline shows Site All Call.4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.Making a Multi-group CallThis feature allows you to transmit to all users onmultiple groups. Your radio must be programmed toallow you to use this feature.Note:Users on the groups cannot respond to aMulti-group Call.1Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select theMulti-group alias or ID.2Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe Multi-group alias or ID.Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode205English
Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call ButtonNote:Programmable buttons press must be initiatedfrom the Home screen.The One Touch Call feature allows you to easilymake a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call aliasor ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or longprogrammable button press.You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to aOne Touch Call button. Your radio can have multipleOne Touch Call buttons programmed.1Press the programmed One Touch Call button tomake a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Callalias or ID.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green.The display shows the Private Call alias or ID.4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.5Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.Making a Call with the Programmable Manual DialButtonMaking a Private Call1Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.The display shows Number:.2Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias orPrivate ID.3Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.4Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The Private Callicon appears in the top right corner. The first textMaking and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode206English
line shows the subscriber alias. The second textline displays the call status.5Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.6Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends. You hear a shorttone. The display shows Call Ended.Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with theProgrammable Manual Dial Button1Press the programmed Manual Dial button toenter into the Manual Dial screen.The display shows Number:.2Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, andpress   to place a call to the entered number.Press   to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by   within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.If successful, the first line of the display showsPhone Call. The second line of the display showsthe dialed telephone number.If an invalid telephone number is selected, thedisplay shows a negative mini notice, Phone CallFailed, Resource Not Available, or InvalidPermissions.If   is pressed with no telephone numberentered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tonethen a negative indicator tone. The displayremains the same.3Long press   to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display shows Phone Call Ended.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode207English
Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the PhoneMenu1 to access the menu.2 or   to Phone and press   to select.3Press   to select Manual Dial.The first line of the display shows Number, thesecond line of the display shows a blinking cursor.4Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, andpress   to place a call to the entered number.Press   to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by   within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.If successful, the first line of the display showsPhone Call. The second line of the display showsthe dialed telephone number.If an invalid telephone number is selected, thedisplay shows a negative mini notice, Phone CallFailed, Resource Not Available, or InvalidPermissions.If   is pressed with no telephone numberentered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tonethen a negative indicator tone. The displayremains the same.5Long press   to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display shows Phone Call Ended.Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from ContactsNote:If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled inMOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option BoardCPS, the Phone Number item will not bedisplayed in the Menu.1 to access the menu.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode208English
2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.3 or   to Manual Dial and press   toselect.4 or   to Phone Number and press   toselect.The first line of the display shows Number, thesecond line of the display shows a blinking cursor.5Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, andpress   to place a call to the entered number.If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows anegative mini notice, Press OK to Send andreturns to the previous screen.Press   to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by   within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.If successful, the first line of the display showsPhone Call. The second line of the display showsthe dialed telephone number.If   is pressed with no telephone numberentered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tonethen a negative indicator tone. The displayremains the same.6Long press   to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display shows Phone Call Ended.Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound PrivatePhone CallWhen you make a Private Phone Call, the first line ofthe display shows Phone Call. The second line ofthe display shows the dialed telephone number.When the call is connected, the Phone Call as PrivateCall icon appears in the top right corner. The first lineof the display shows the telephone number.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode209English
If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mininotice, Phone Call Failed, Resource NotAvailable, or Invalid Permissions.Long press   to end the call.The display returns to the previous screen.Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected OutboundPrivate Phone CallDuring the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows the telephone number.1Use the keypad to enter the digits.Press   to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by   within 2 seconds to inserta pause. The P replaces * and # on the display.The first text line of the display shows ExtraDigits, the second text line of the display showsthe entered extra digits.2Press the   button.If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows anegative mini notice, Press OK to Send andreturns to the previous screen.The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayshows the telephone number with the over-dialdigits appended.3Do one of the following.•Press   to return to the Phone Call screen.•Long press   to end the call.Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected OutboundPrivate Phone CallDuring the call, the Phone Call as Private Call iconappears in the top right corner. The first text line ofthe display shows the telephone number.1Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enterthe digits.The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in thetop right corner. The first text line of the displayMaking and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode210English
shows the telephone number with the over-dialdigits appended.2Long press   to end the call.The first line of the display shows Ending. Thesecond line of the display shows Phone Call....The display shows Phone Call Ended.Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode211English
Advanced Features in Connect PlusModeAuto FallbackAuto Fallback is a system feature that allows you tocontinue to make and receive non-emergency callson the selected Group Contact in the event of certaintypes of Connect Plus system failures.If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts toroam to a different Connect Plus site. This searchprocess may result in your radio finding an operableConnect Plus site, or it may result in your radio findinga “Fallback Channel” (if your radio is enabled for AutoFallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that isnormally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but iscurrently unable to communicate with either its sitecontroller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallbackmode, the repeater operates as a single digitalrepeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-emergency Group Calls only. No other call types aresupported in Fallback Mode.Indications of Auto Fallback ModeWhen your radio is using a Fallback channel, youhear the intermittent “Fallback Tone” approximatelyonce every 15 seconds (except while transmitting).The display periodically shows a brief message,“Fallback Channel”. Your radio only permits PTT onthe selected Group Contact (Group Call, MultigroupCall, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to makeother types of calls.Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback ModeNote:Calls are heard only by radios that aremonitoring the same Fallback channel andselected to the same Group. Calls are notnetworked to other sites or other repeaters.Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alertsare not available in Fallback mode. If youpress the emergency button in Fallback mode,the radio provides an invalid key press tone.Display-equipped radios also show themessage, “Feature not available”.Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are notavailable in Fallback mode. If you attempt aAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode212English
call to a private contact, you will receive adenial tone. At this point you should select adesired group contact. Other non-supportedcalls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, RadioCheck, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Textmessaging, Location Updates, and packetdata calls.Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) isnot supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two ormore radio users press PTT at the same time(or at almost the same time), it is possible thatboth radios transmit until PTT is released. Inthis event, it is possible that none of thetransmissions will be understood by receivingradios.Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normalfunctioning. Simply select the group contact you wishto use (using the radio’s normal channel selectionmethod), and then press the PTT to start your call. Itis possible that the channel may be in use already byanother group. If the channel is in use, you receive abusy tone and the display will say “Channel Busy”.You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Callcontacts using your radio’s normal channel selectionmethod. While the radio is operating on the FallbackChannel, the Multigroup operates just like otherGroups. It is only heard by radios that are currentlyselected to the same Multi-group.Returning to Normal OperationIf the site returns to normal trunking operation whileyou are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radioautomatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear aregistration “beep” when the radio successfullyregisters. If you are in the range of an operable site(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press theRoam Request button (if programmed for your radio)to force your radio to search for and register on anavailable site. If no other site is available, your radioreturns to Auto Fallback mode after searching iscomplete. If you drive out of coverage of yourFallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode(display indicates “Searching”).Radio CheckIf enabled, this feature allows you to determine ifanother radio is active in a system without disturbingthe user of that radio. No audible or visual notificationis shown on the target radio.This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliasesor IDs.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode213English
Sending a Radio Check1Access the Radio Check feature.RadioControlStepsProgram-med Ra-dio Checkbutton1Press the programmed RadioCheck button.2 or   to the required sub-scriber alias or ID and press to select.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press to select.3 or   to the required sub-scriber alias or ID and press to select.4 or   to Radio Check andpress   to select.The display shows the Target Alias, indicating therequest is in progress. The LED lights up solidgreen.2Wait for acknowledgement.If the target radio is active in the system, a tonesounds and the display briefly shows TargetRadio Available.If the target radio is not active in the system, atone sounds and the display briefly shows TargetRadio Not Available.Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screenwhen initiated via Menu.Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated viathe programmable button.Remote MonitorUse the Remote Monitor feature to turn on themicrophone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDsonly). The green LED will blink once on the targetsubscriber. You can use this feature to monitor,remotely, any audible activity surrounding the targetradio.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode214English
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to usethis feature.Initiating Remote MonitorNote:Remote Monitor automatically stops after aprogrammed duration or when there is anyattempt to initiate transmission, changechannels or power down the radio.1Access the Remote Monitor feature.RadioControlStepsProgram-med Re-moteMonitorButton1Press the programmed RemoteMonitor button.2 or   to the required sub-scriber alias or ID and press to select.Menu 1 to access the menu.RadioControlSteps2 or   to Contacts and press to select.3 or   to the required sub-scriber alias or ID and press to select.4 or   to Manual Dial andpress   to select.5 or   to Remote Mon. andpress   to select.The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. Thesecond text line displays the Target Alias,indicating the request is in progress. The LEDlights up blinking green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display momentarily shows Rem. MonitorAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode215English
Successful. Your radio starts playing audio fromthe monitored radio for a programmed durationand display shows Rem. Monitor, followed bytarget alias. Once the timer expires, the radiosounds an alert tone and the LED turns off.If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negativeindicator tone the display shows Rem. MonitorFailed.ScanThis feature allows your radio to monitor and join callsfor groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list.When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on thestatus bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle.Starting and Stopping ScanNote:This procedure turns the Scan feature On orOff for all Connect Plus zones with the sameNetwork ID as your currently selected zone. Itis important to note that even when the Scanfeature is turned on via this procedure, scanmay still be disabled for some (or all) groupson your scan list. See Editing the Scan List onpage 218 for more information.You can start and stop scanning by pressing theprogrammed Scan button OR follow the proceduredescribed next.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan and press   to select.3 or   to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select.•The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled.•The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan isenabled.•The display shows Scan Off if scan isdisabled.•The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan isdisabled.Responding to a Transmission During a ScanDuring scanning, your radio stops on a group whereactivity is detected. The radio continuously listens forany member in the scan list when idle on the controlchannel.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode216English
1Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.2Press the PTT button during hang time.The LED lights up solid green.3Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.4Release the PTT button to listen.If you do not respond within the hang time, theradio returns to scanning other groups.User Configurable ScanIf the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Addand Remove the scan members from the AddMember menu. A Scan List member must be aregular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site AllCall/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assignedto a Channel Selector position in a Connect PlusZone with the same Network ID as the currentlyselected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not matchany Talkgroup that has been included in the currentZone's Scan List.Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or bypressing a programmed Scan On/Off button.This feature functions only when the radio is notcurrently involved in a call. If you are presentlylistening to a call, your radio cannot scan for othergroup calls, and is therefore unaware they are inprogress. Once your call is finished, your radioreturns to the control channel time slot and is able toscan for groups that are in the scan list.Turning Scan On or OffNote:This procedure turns the Scan feature On orOff for all zones with the same Network ID asyour currently selected zone. It is important tonote that even when the Scan feature isturned on via this procedure, scan may still bedisabled for some (or all) groups on your scanlist. See the next section for more information.If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on yourdisplay. When Scan is on and you are notparticipating in a call, the LED blinks green andyellow.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode217English
The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends onhow your radio is programmed. If programmed with aScan On/Off button, use the button to toggle thefeature on or off. If your radio has been programmedso that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu,follow the procedure described next.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan and press   to select.3 or   to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select.•The display shows Scan On momentarily ifscan is disabled.•The display shows Scan Off momentarily ifscan is enabled.Editing the Scan ListNote:If the scan list entry happens to be the radio’scurrently selected group, the radio listens foractivity on this group regardless of whether thelist entry currently shows a check mark or not.Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radiolistens for activity on its Selected Group,Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its DefaultEmergency Revert Group (if configured forone). This operation cannot be disabled. IfScan is enabled the radio will also listen foractivity on enabled Zone Scan List members.Your scan list determines which groups can bescanned. The list is created when your radio isprogrammed. If your radio has been programmed toallow you to edit the scan list, you can,• Enable/disable scan for individual groups on thelist.• Add and Remove the scan members from the AddMember menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group viathe Add Members Menu on page 219.Note:A Scan List member must be a regular GroupContact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currentlyassigned to a Channel Selector position in aConnect Plus Zone with the same Network IDas the currently selected Zone.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode218English
The Talkgroup alias must not match anyTalkgroup that has been included in thecurrent Zone's Scan List.1 to access the menu.2 or   to View/Edit List and press   toselect.3 or   to the desired Group name.If a check mark precedes the Group name, thenscan is currently enabled for this Group.If there is no check mark preceding the Groupname, then scan is currently disabled for thisGroup.4 to select the desired Group.The display shows Enable if scan is currentlydisabled for the Group.The display shows Disable if scan is currentlyenabled for the Group.5Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable)and press   to select.Depending on which option was selected, theradio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or ScanDisabled as confirmation.The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scanwas enabled for the Group, the check mark displaysbefore the Group name. If scan was disabled for theGroup, the check mark is removed before the Groupname.Add or Delete a Group via the Add MembersMenuThe Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicategroup number or a duplicate group alias to be placedon a zone scan list (or to be shown as a “scancandidate”). Thus, the list of “scan candidates”described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes afteradding or deleting a group from the zone scan list.If your radio has been programmed to allow you toedit the scan list, you can use the Add Membersmenu to add a group to the scan list of the currentlyAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode219English
selected zone, or to delete a group from the san list ofthe currently selected zone.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Scan option and press   to select.3 or   to <Add Members> and press   toselect.The display shows “Add Members from Zone n” (n= the Connect Plus zone number of the firstConnect Plus zone in your radio with the sameNetwork ID as your currently selected zone).4Do one of the following.• If the group you want to add to the scan list isassigned to a channel selector position in thatzone, go to step 6.• If the group you want to add to the scan list isassigned to a channel selector position in adifferent Connect Plus zone, go to step 5.5 or   to scroll a list of Connect Plus zonesthat have the same Network ID as the currentlyselected zone.6After locating the Connect Plus zone where thedesired group is assigned to a channel selectorposition, press   to select.Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groupsassigned to a channel position in that zone. Thegroups on the list are called “scan candidates”,because they can be added to the scan list of yourcurrently selected zone (or they are already on thezone scan list).If the zone does not have any groups that can beadded to the scan list, the radio displays NoCandidates.7 or   to scroll through the list of candidategroups.If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately beforethe group alias, this indicates the group iscurrently on the scan list for the selected zone.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode220English
If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediatelybefore the alias, the group is not currently on thescan list, but can be added.8Press   when the desired group alias isdisplayed.If this group is not currently on the scan list for thecurrently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias)message is displayed.If this group is already on the scan list for thecurrently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias)message is displayed.9Press   to accept the displayed message (Addor Delete).If deleting a group from the list, you will know theoperation is successful because the plus sign (+)will no longer display immediately before the alias.If adding a group to the list, you will know theoperation is successful because the plus sign (+)will display before the alias.If you are attempting to add a group, and the list isalready full, the radio displays List Full. If thisshould occur, it will be necessary to delete a groupfrom the scan list prior to adding a new one.10When finished, press   as many times asnecessary to return to the desired menu.Understanding Scan OperationNote:If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan Listmember from a different Zone and Call HangTimer expires before you are able to respond,in order to respond, you must navigate to theZone and Channel of the Scan List Memberand start a new call.There are some circumstances in which you can misscalls for groups that are in your scan list. When youmiss a call for one of the following reasons, this doesnot indicate a problem with your radio. This is anormal scan operation for Connect Plus.• Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scanicon on the display).Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode221English
• Scan list member has been disabled via the menu(see Editing the Scan List on page 218).• You are participating in a call already.•No member of the scanned group is registered atyour site (Multisite systems only).Scan TalkbackIf your radio scans into a call from the selectablegroup scan list, and if the PTT button is pressedduring the scanned call, the operation of the radiodepends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled ordisabled during radio programming. For moreinformation on how your radio is programmed,contact your radio dealer (or your radio systemadministrator).ScanTalkbackDisabledThe radio leaves the scanned call andattempts to transmit on the contact forthe currently selected channelposition. After the Call Hang Time onthe currently selected contact expires,the radio returns to the home channeland starts the Scan Hang Time Timer.The radio resumes group scan after itsScan Hang Time Timer expires.ScanTalkbackEnabledIf the PTT button is pressed during theGroup Hang Time of the scanned call,the radio attempts to transmit to thescanned group.Note:If you scan into a call for a group that is notassigned to a channel position in the currentlyselected zone and you miss the Hang Time ofthe call, switch to the proper zone and thenselect the channel position of the group to talkback to that group.Contacts SettingsNote:You can add, or edit subscriber IDs forConnect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriberIDs can only be performed by your dealer.If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel,you can make a privacy-enabled voice call onthat channel. Only target radios with the samePrivacy Key, or the same Key Value and KeyID as your radio are able to unscramble thetransmission.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode222English
Contacts provide “address-book” capabilities on yourradio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID thatyou use to initiate a call.Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100contacts. The following contact types are available:• Private Call• Group Call•Multigroup Call• Site All Call Voice• Site All Call Text• Dispatch CallThe Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a textmessage to a dispatcher PC through a third-partyText Message Server.Making a Private Call from Contacts1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias:• Select the subscriber alias directly.• or   to the required subscriber alias orID.•Use the Manual Dial menu.• or   to Manual Dial and press to select.• If there was previously dialed subscriberalias or ID, the alias or ID appears alongwith a blinking cursor. Use the keypad toedit/enter the ID. Press   to select.4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.5Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode223English
7Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen and the display shows the transmittinguser's ID.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.You hear a short tone. The display shows CallEnded.Making a Call Alias SearchYou can also use alias or alphanumeric search toretrieve the required subscriber alias.This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.The entries are alphabetically sorted.3Key in the first character of the required alias, andthen press   or   to locate the required alias.4Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.5Press the PTT button to make the call.The LED lights up solid green. The display showsthe destination alias.6Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled),and speak clearly into the microphone.7Release the PTT button to listen.When the target radio responds, the LED blinksgreen.If there is no voice activity for a predeterminedperiod of time, the call ends.The display shows Call Ended.Adding a New Contact1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode224English
3 or   to New Contact and press   toselect.4Use the keypad to enter the contact number andpress   to confirm.5Use the keypad to enter the contact name andpress   to confirm.6If adding a Radio Contact,   or   to therequired ringer type and press   to select.The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and thedisplay shows Contact Saved.Call Indicator SettingsActivating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call AlertYou can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for areceived Call Alert.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alert and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.6 or   to Call Alert and press   toselect.The current tone is indicated by a  .7 or   to the required tone and press   toselect. appears beside selected tone.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode225English
Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for PrivateCallsYou can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedPrivate Call.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.6 or   to Private Call and press   toselect.Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for TextMessageYou can turn on or off the ringing tones for a receivedText Message.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Call Ringers and press   toselect.6 or   to Text Message and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode226English
The current tone is indicated by a  .7 or   to the required tone and press   toselect. appears beside selected tone.Selecting a Ring Alert TypeNote:The programmed Ring Alert Type button isassigned via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.You can program the radio calls to onepredetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status isdisabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon.If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alerttype is displayed.The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentaryring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is arepetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate,the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is anyincoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert orMessage). It sounds like a good key tone or missedcall.For radios with batteries that support the vibratefeature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, theavailable Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring,Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate.For radios with batteries that do not support thevibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating beltclip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. Theavailable Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring.You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing oneof the following actions.•Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button toaccess the Ring Alert Type menu.a) Press   or   to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &Vibrate or Silent and press   to select.•Access this feature via the menu.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to Utilities and press to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode227English
c) Press   or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.d) Press   or   to Tones/Alerts and press to select.e) Press   or   to Ring Alert Type andpress   to select.f) Press   or   to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &Vibrate or Silent and press   to select.Configuring Vibrate StyleNote:The programmed Vibrate Style button isassigned via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clipis attached to the radio with a battery that supportsthe vibrate feature.You can configure the vibrate style by performing oneof the following actions.•Press the programmed Vibrate Style button toaccess the Vibrate Style menu.a) Press   or   to Short, Medium, or Longand press   to select.•Access this feature via the menu.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to Utilities and press to select.c) Press   or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.d) Press   or   to Tones/Alerts and press to select.e) Press   or   to Vibrate Style and press to select.f) Press   or   to Short, Medium, or Longand press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode228English
Escalating Alarm Tone VolumeYou can program your radio to continually alert youwhen a radio call remains unanswered. This is doneby automatically increasing the alarm tone volumeover time. This feature is known as Escalert.Call Log FeaturesYour radio keeps track of all recent outgoing,answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call logfeature to view and manage recent calls.You can perform the following tasks in each of yourcall lists:• Delete• View DetailsViewing Recent CallsThe lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Call Log and press   to select.3 or   to preferred list and press   toselect.The display shows the most recent entry at the topof the list.4 or   to view the list.Press the PTT button to start a Private Call withthe current selected alias or ID.Deleting a Call from a Call List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Call Log and press   to select.3 or   to the required list and press   toselect.When you select a call list and it contains noentries, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page152).Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode229English
4 or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.5 or   to Delete and press   to select.6Do one of the following:•Press   to select Yes to delete the entry.The display shows Entry Deleted.• or   to No, and press the   button toreturn to the previous screen.Viewing Details from a Call List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Call Log and press   to select.3 or   to the required list and press   toselect.4 or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.5 or   to View Details and press   toselect.Display shows details.Call Alert OperationCall Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radiouser to call you back when they are able to do so.This feature is accessible through the menu viaContacts, manual dial or a programmed One TouchAccess button.Receiving and Responding to a Call AlertWhen you receive a Call Alert page, you see thenotification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID ofthe calling radio on the display.When you hear a repetitive tone and the LEDblinks yellow, do one of the following:Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode230English
• Press the PTT button while the display stillshows the Call Alert in the Notification List torespond with a Private Call.•Press   to exit the Notification List. The alertis moved to the Missed Call Log.See Notification List on page 270 for details aboutthe Notification List.See Call Log Features on page 229 for detailsabout the Missed Call List.Making a Call Alert from the Contact List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press   to select.3Use one of the steps described next to select therequired subscriber alias or ID:• select the subscriber alias directly• or   to the required subscriber aliasand press   to select.•use the Manual Dial menu• or   to Manual Dial and press to select.• The Manual Dial text entry screen shall bedisplayed. Enter the Subscriber ID andpress  .4 or   to Call Alert and press   toselect.The display shows Call Alert: <SubscriberAlias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriberalias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has beensent.The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows Call Alert Successful.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows Call Alert Failed.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode231English
Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access ButtonPress the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias.The display shows Call Alert and thesubscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alerthas been sent.The LED lights up solid green when your radio issending the Call Alert.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, thedisplay shows Call Alert Successful.If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received,the display shows Call Alert Failed.Emergency OperationNote:If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silentwith Voice emergency initiation, in most casesit automatically exits silent operation after theEmergency Call or Emergency Alert isfinished. The exception to this rule is whenEmergency Alert is the configured EmergencyMode and Silent is the configured EmergencyType. If your radio is programmed in thismanner, the silent operation continues untilyou cancel silent operation by pressing PTT orthe button configured for Emergency Off.Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alertsare not supported when operating in ConnectPlus Auto Fallback mode. For moreinformation see the Auto Fallback on page212.An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a criticalsituation. You can initiate an Emergency at any timeon any screen display, even when there is activity onthe current channel. Pressing the Emergency buttoninitiates the programmed Emergency mode. Theprogrammed Emergency mode may also be initiatedby triggering the optional Man Down feature. TheEmergency feature may be disabled in your radio.Your dealer can set the duration of a button press forthe programmed Emergency button, except for longpress, which is similar with all other buttons:Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75seconds.Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75seconds.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode232English
The Emergency button is assigned with theEmergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer forthe assigned operation of the Emergency button.• If the short press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then thelong press for the Emergency button is assignedto exit the Emergency mode.• If the long press for the Emergency button isassigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then theshort press for the Emergency button is assignedto exit the Emergency mode.When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone,it supports three Emergency modes:EmergencyCallYou must press the PTT button totalk on the assigned emergency timeslot.EmergencyCall withVoice toFollowFor the first transmission on theassigned emergency time slot, themicrophone is automaticallyunmuted and you may talk withoutpressing the PTT button. Themicrophone stays “hot” in thisfashion for a time periodprogrammed into the radio. Forsubsequent transmissions in thesame Emergency call, you mustpress the PTT button.EmergencyAlertAn Emergency Alert is not a voicecall. It is an emergency notificationthat is sent to radios that areconfigured to receive these alerts.The radio sends an emergency alertvia the control channel of thecurrently registered site. TheEmergency Alert is received byradios in the Connect Plus networkthat are programmed to receivethem (no matter which network sitethey are registered to).Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assignedto the Emergency button per zone. In addition, eachEmergency mode has the following types:Regular Radio initiates an Emergency andshows audio and/or visual indicators.Silent Radio initiates an Emergency withoutany audio or visual indicators. The radiosuppresses all audio or visualindications of the Emergency until youAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode233English
press the PTT button to start a voicetransmission.SilentwithVoiceThe same as Silent operation, exceptthat the radio also unmutes for somevoice transmissions.Receiving an Incoming EmergencyYour radio may be programmed to sound an alerttone and also display information about the incomingEmergency. If so programmed, upon receiving theincoming Emergency, the display shows theEmergency Details screen with the emergency icon,the Alias or ID of the radio that requested theEmergency, the Group Contact being used for theEmergency, and one additional line of information.The additional information is the name of the zonethat contains the Group Contact.At the present time, the radio displays only the mostrecently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency isreceived before the prior Emergency is cleared, thedetails for the new Emergency replace the details ofthe previous Emergency.Depending on how your radio has been programmed,the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen)will stay on your radio’s display even after theEmergency ends. You can save the emergencydetails to the Alarm List, or you can delete theemergency details as described in the followingsections.Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm ListSaving the emergency details to the Alarm List allowsyou to view the details again at a later time byselecting Alarm List from the Main Menu.1While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List)screen is displayed, press  .The Exit Alarm List screen displays.2Perform one of the following actions:•Select Yes and press   to save theemergency details to the Alarm List, and to exitthe Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.•Select No and press   to return to theEmergency Details (or Alarm List) screen.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode234English
Deleting the Emergency Details1While the Emergency Details screen is displayed,press  .The Delete screen displays.2Perform one of the following actions:•Select Yes and press   to delete theemergency details.•Select No and press   to return to theEmergency Details screen.Responding to an Emergency CallNote:If you do not respond to the Emergency Callwithin the time allotted for the Emergency CallHang Time, the Emergency call will end. If youwant to speak to the group after theEmergency Call Hang Time expires, you mustfirst select the channel position assigned tothe group (if not already selected). Then,press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call tothe group.1When receiving an Emergency Call, press anybutton to stop all Emergency Call receivedindications.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission on the Emergency group.All radios that are monitoring this group hear yourtransmission.4Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled)and speak clearly into the microphone.The LED lights up green.5Release the PTT button to listen.When the emergency initiating radio responds, theLED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon,the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on yourdisplay.Responding to an Emergency AlertNote:The Group contact used for the EmergencyAlert should not be used for voicecommunication. This could prevent otherAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode235English
radios from sending and receiving EmergencyAlerts on the same group.An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that theuser is in an urgent situation. You may respond to thealert by initiating a private call to the radio whodeclared the emergency, initiating a group call to adesignated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert,initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. Theproper response is determined by your organizationand the individual situation.Initiating an Emergency CallNote:If your radio is set to Silent, it does not displayany audio or visual indicators duringEmergency mode until you press the PTTbutton to initiate a voice transmission.If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it doesnot initially display any audio or visualindicators that the radio is in Emergencymode. However, your radio unmutes for thetransmissions of radios responding to youremergency. The emergency indicators onlyappear once you press the PTT button toinitiate a voice transmission from your radio.For both “Silent” and “Silent with Voice”operation, the radio automatically exits silentoperation after the Emergency Call is finished.1Press the programmed Emergency button.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3Press the PTT button to initiate a voicetransmission on the Emergency group.When you release the PTT button, the Emergencycall continues for the time allotted for theEmergency Call Hang Time.If you press the PTT button during this time, theEmergency call continues.Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to FollowYour radio must be programmed for this type ofoperation.When enabled for this operation, when you press theprogrammed Emergency button, and when yourradio receives the time slot assignment, themicrophone is automatically activated withoutpressing the PTT button. This activated microphoneAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode236English
state is also known as “hot mic”. The “hot mic” appliesto the first voice transmission from your radio duringthe Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions inthe same Emergency call, you must press the PTTbutton.1Press the programmed Emergency button.2Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0cm) from your mouth.3The microphone remains active for the “hot mic”time specified in your radio's codeplugprogramming.During this time, the LED lights up green.4Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer thanthe programmed duration.Initiating an Emergency AlertNote:If your radio is programmed for “Silent” or“Silent with Voice”, it will not provide any audioor visual indications that it is sending anEmergency Alert. If programmed for “Silent”,the silent operation continues indefinitely untilyou press PTT or the button configured for“Emergency Off”. If programmed for “Silentwith Voice”, the radio automatically cancelssilent operation when the site controllerbroadcasts the Emergency Alert.Press the orange Emergency button.Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the sitecontroller, the radio’s display shows theEmergency icon, the Group contact used for theEmergency Alert, and TX Alarm.Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and isbeing broadcast for other radios to hear, a positiveindicator tone sounds and the radio’s display showsAlarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful,a negative indicator tone sounds and the radiodisplays Alarm Failed.Exiting Emergency ModeNote:If the Emergency call ends due to theexpiration of the Emergency Hang Time, butthe emergency condition is not over, press theEmergency button again to restart theprocess.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode237English
If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing theprogrammed Emergency button, your radioautomatically exits Emergency mode after receiving aresponse from the Connect Plus system.If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing theprogrammed Emergency button, your radio will beassigned a channel automatically when one becomesavailable. Once your radio has transmitted amessage indicating the emergency, you cannotcancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressedthe button by accident or the emergency no longerexists, you may wish to say this over the assignedchannel. When you release the PTT button, theEmergency call is discontinued after the EmergencyCall Hang Time expires.If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voiceto Follow, use the “hot mic” period to explain yourerror, then press and release the PTT button todiscontinue the transmission. The Emergency call isdiscontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Timeexpires.Man Down AlarmsNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.Man Down Alarms are not supported whenoperating in Fallback mode. For moreinformation see the Auto Fallback on page212.This section describes the Connect Plus Man DownFeature. This is a purchasable feature that may ormay not apply to your radio.Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled andprogrammed for one or more of the Man DownAlarms. Your dealer or radio system administrator cantell you whether or not this applies to your radio andwhich specific Man Down Alarms have been enabledand programmed.If your radio has been programmed for one or more ofthe following Man Down Alarms, it is important for youto understand how the Alarm works, what indication(tones) your radio provides, and the action you shouldtake.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode238English
The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alertothers when you might be in danger. This isaccomplished by programming your radio to detect acertain angle of tilt, lack of movement, or movement,depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) is/areenabled. If your radio detects a disallowed movementtype, and if the condition is not corrected in a certainperiod of time, the radio starts to play an Alert Tone (ifso programmed). At this point you should immediatelytake one or more of the corrective actions discussedbelow, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) has/have been enabled for your radio. If you do not takecorrective action within a certain period of time, yourradio automatically starts an Emergency (either anEmergency Call or Emergency Alert).•Tilt Alarm – When your radio is tilted at or beyonda specified angle for a period of time, it plays anAlert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent theradio from automatically starting an EmergencyCall or Emergency Alert, restore the radio to thevertical position immediately.•Anti-Movement Alarm – When your radio ismotionless for a period of time, it plays an AlertTone (if so programmed). To prevent the radiofrom automatically starting an Emergency Call orEmergency Alert, move the radio immediately.•Movement Alarm – When your radio is in motionfor a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if soprogrammed). To prevent the radio fromautomatically starting an Emergency Call orEmergency Alert, stop the radio’s motionimmediately.Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell youwhich of the above alarms (if any) has been enabledthrough radio programming. It is possible to enableboth the Tilt and Anti- Movement Alarms. In that case,the Alert Tone plays when the radio detects the firstmovement violation.Instead of taking the corrective actions discussedabove, you can also prevent the radio from startingthe Emergency call or Emergency Alert by using aprogrammable button, if your radio has beenconfigured in this manner. This is discussed in thenext two sections.Turning Man Down Alarms On and OffNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only. The programmed Man Downbutton and Man Down settings are assignedvia CPS. Check with your dealer or systemAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode239English
administrator to determine how your radio hasbeen programmed.If you enable Man Down to maximumsensitivity and set Vibrate Style to high, theradio automatically restricts Vibrate Style tomedium. This function prevents high VibrateStyle from initiating the Man Down emergencyfeature.The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms Onand Off depends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button,use the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms Onand Off. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarmsenabled for your radio.When using the programmable button to toggle theMan Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone thatrises in pitch and displays a brief confirmationmessage.When using the programmable button to toggle theMan Down Alarms Off, your radio plays a tone thatfalls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.In order to hear the tones described above whenturning the Man Down Alarms On and Off, theMOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Boardmust both be enabled for keypad tones.If your radio has been programmed so that ManDown Alarms can be turned On and Off via the menu,perform the following procedure.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Connect Plus and press   toselect.4 or   to Man Down Alarm and press   toselect.If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, theEnable option is shown.If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, theDisable option is shown.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode240English
5 or   to Enable or Disable and press to select.Resetting the Man Down AlarmsNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.If your radio has been programmed with either a ManDown Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarmsmenu option, it is possible to reset the Man DownAlarms without turning them On or Off. This stops anyMan Down Alert Tone that is currently playing, and italso resets the Alarm timers. However, it is stillnecessary to correct the movement violation by takingthe appropriate corrective action described in the ManDown Alarms section. If the movement violation is notcorrected within a period of time, the Alert Tone startsplaying again.The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarmsdepends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Man Down Alarms Reset button,use the button to Reset the Man Down Alarms. Thisapplies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled foryour radio.When using the programmable button to reset theMan Down Alarms, the radio shows a briefconfirmation message.If your radio has been programmed so that ManDown Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow theprocedure below.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Connect Plus and press   toselect.4 or   to Man Down Alarm and press   toselect.5 or   to Reset and press   to select.The radio displays a brief confirmation message.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode241English
Beacon FeatureThis section describes the Beacon feature. TheBeacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, apurchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio SystemAdministrator can tell you if the Beacon featureapplies to your radio.If your radio has been enabled and programmed forone or more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also beenabled for the Beacon feature.If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Callor Emergency Alert due to one of the Man DownAlarms, and if your radio is also enabled for theBeacon feature, the radio starts to periodically emit ahigh pitched tone approximately once every tenseconds. The interval can vary depending on whetheryou are talking on your radio. The purpose of theBeacon tone is to help searchers locate you. If yourradio has also been enabled for the “Visual Beacon”,the radio’s backlight comes on for a few secondsevery time the Beacon tone plays.You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon toneby using a programmable button, if your radio hasbeen configured in this manner. This is discussed inthe next two sections. If your radio does not have theprogrammable button or menu option, you can stopthe Beacon tone by turning the radio off and then onagain, or by changing to a different zone (if your radiohas been programmed for more than one zone).Turning Beacon On and OffThe procedure for turning the Beacon On and Offdepends on how your radio is programmed. Ifprogrammed with a Beacon On/Off button, use thebutton to toggle the Beacon On and Off.• When using the programmable button to togglethe Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that risesin pitch and shows a brief confirmation message.• When using the programmable button to togglethe Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls inpitch and shows a brief confirmation message.In order to hear the tones described above whenturning the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBOradio and Connect Plus Option Board must both beenabled for keypad tones. If your radio has beenprogrammed so that the Beacon can be turned Onand Off via the menu, follow the procedure below.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode242English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Connect Plus and press   toselect.4 or   to Beacon and press   to select.If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable optionis shown.If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable optionis shown.5 or   to Enable or Disable and press to select.The radio shows a brief message to confirm thatMan Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled).Resetting the BeaconIf your radio has been programmed with either theBeacon Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, itis possible to reset the Beacon. This stops theBeacon Tone (and also the Visual Beacon) withoutturning the Beacon feature Off. The procedure forresetting the Beacon depends on how your radio isprogrammed. If programmed with a Beacon Resetbutton, use the button to Reset the Beacon. Whenusing the programmable button to reset the ManDown Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmationmessage. If your radio has been programmed so thatthe Beacon can be Reset via the menu, follow theprocedure below.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Connect Plus and press   toselect.4 or   to Beacon and press   to select.5 or   to Reset and press   to select.The radio displays a brief confirmation message.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode243English
Text Message FeaturesYour radio is able to receive data, for example a textmessage, from another radio or a text messageapplication.The maximum length of characters for sending a textmessage, including the subject line (seen whenreceiving message from an e-mail application),depends on CPS configuration which can beconfigured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radiocan receive a text message with maximum length of280 characters.If user forwards a text message with characters morethan the maximum length, the text message will betruncated to the maximum length.The radio exits the current screen once the inactivitytimer expires.Note:Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Writing and Sending a Text Message1Access the Text Message feature.RadioControlsStepsProgram-med TextMessagebuttonPress the programmed Text Mes-sage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Compose and press   to select.A blinking cursor appears.3Use the keypad to type your message.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode244English
4Press   once message is composed.5If you are sending the message, select therecipient by• or   to the required alias and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248).Sending a Quick Text MessageYour radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Textmessages as programmed by your dealer.While Quick Text messages are predefined, you canedit each message before sending it.If you are sending the message, select therecipient by• or   to the required alias and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode245English
If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.If the text message fails to send, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248).Sending a Quick Text Message with the One TouchAccess ButtonPress the programmed One Touch Accessbutton to send a predefined Quick Text messageto a predefined alias.The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the displayshows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.If the text message fails to send, the radio returns youto the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248).Accessing the Drafts FolderYou can save a text message to send it at a latertime.If a PTT button press or a mode change causes theradio to exit the text message writing/editing screenwhile you are in the process of writing or editing a textmessage, your current text message is automaticallysaved to the Drafts folder.The most recent saved text message is always addedto the top of the Drafts list.The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) lastsaved messages. When the folder is full, the nextsaved text message automatically replaces the oldesttext message in the folder.Note:Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Viewing a Saved Text Message1Access the Text Message feature.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode246English
Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Drafts and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message1Press   again while viewing the message.2 or   to Edit and press   to select.A blinking cursor appears.3Use the keypad to type your message.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod.4Press   once message is composed.5Select the message recipient by• or   to the required alias and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode247English
The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved tothe Sent Items folder and marked with a SendFailed icon.Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts1Access the Text Message feature.Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Drafts and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.4 or   to Delete and press   to delete thetext message.Managing Fail-to-Send Text MessagesYou can select one of the following options while atthe Resend option screen:• Resend• Forward•EditResending a Text MessagePress   to resend the same message to thesame subscriber/group alias or ID.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows the positive mini notice.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode248English
If the message cannot be sent, the display showsthe negative mini notice.Forwarding a Text MessageSelect Forward to send the message to anothersubscriber/group alias or ID.1 or   to Forward and press   to select.2Select the message recipient by• or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.Editing a Text MessageSelect Edit to edit the message before sending it.1 or   to Edit and press   to select.A blinking cursor appears.2Use the keypad to edit your message.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod.3Press   once message is composed.4Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-edit, or delete the newly composed message, doone of the following.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode249English
• or   to Send, and press   to send themessage.• or   to Save, and press   to save themessage to the Drafts folder.• to edit the message.• again to choose between deleting themessage or saving it to the Drafts folder.5If you are sending the message, select therecipient by• or   to the required alias or ID and press to select.• or   to Manual Dial, and press   toselect. The first line of the display showsNumber:. The second line of the display showsa blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias orID and press  .The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.Managing Sent Text MessagesOnce a message is sent to another radio, it is savedin Sent Items. The most recent sent text message isalways added to the top of the Sent Items list.The Sent Items folder is capable of storing amaximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When thefolder is full, the next sent text message automaticallyreplaces the oldest text message in the folder.Note:Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Viewing a Sent Text Message1Access the Text Message feature.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode250English
RadioControlsStepsProgram-med TextMessagebuttonPress the programmed Text Mes-sage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Sent Items and press   toselect.3 or   to the required message and press to select.The icon at the top right corner of the screenindicates the status of the message (see Sent ItemIcons on page 194).Sending a Sent Text MessageYou can select one of the following options whileviewing a sent text message:• Resend• Forward•Edit• Delete1Press   again while viewing the message.2 or   to one of the following options andpress   to select.Option StepsForward Select Forward to send the selectedtext message to another subscriber/group alias or ID (see Forwarding aText Message on page 249).Edit Select Edit to edit the selected textmessage before sending it (see Ed-iting a Text Message on page 249).Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode251English
Option StepsDelete Select Delete to delete the textmessage.Resend Select Resend to resend the select-ed text message to the same sub-scriber/group alias or ID.The display shows Sending Mes‐sage, confirming that the same mes-sage is being sent to the same tar-get radio.If the message is sent successfully,a tone sounds and the displayshows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, alow tone sounds and the displayshows Message Send Failed.If the message fails to send, the ra-dio returns you to the Resend optionscreen. Press   to resend themessage to the same subscriber/group alias or ID.Option StepsNote:If you exit the messagesending screen while themessage is being sent, theradio updates the status ofthe message in the SentItems folder without provid-ing any indication in the dis-play or via sound.Note:If the radio changes mode orpowers down before the sta-tus of the message in SentItems is updated, the radiocannot complete any In-Progress messages and au-tomatically marks it with aSend Failed icon.Note:The radio supports a maxi-mum of five (5) In-Progressmessages at one time. Dur-ing this period, the radioAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode252English
Option Stepscannot send any new mes-sage and automaticallymarks it with a Send Failedicon.If you exit the message sending screen while themessage is being sent, the radio updates thestatus of the message in the Sent Items folderwithout providing any indication in the display orvia sound.If the radio changes mode or powers down beforethe status of the message in Sent Items isupdated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks itwith a Send Failed icon.The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. During thisperiod, the radio cannot send any new messageand automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items1Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Sent Items and press   toselect.When you select Sent Items and it contains notext messages, the display shows List Empty,and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turnedon (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page152).3 or   to Delete All and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode253English
4Choose one of the following.• or   to Yes and press   to select. Thedisplay shows positive mini notice.• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious screen.Receiving a Text MessageWhen your radio receives a message, the displayshows the Notification List with the alias or ID of thesender and the Message icon.You can select one of the following options whenreceiving a text message:• Read• Read Later•DeleteReading a Text Message1 or   to Read? and press   to select.Selected message in the Inbox opens.2Do one of the following:•Press   to return to the Inbox.•Press   a second time to reply, forward, ordelete the text message.Managing Received Text MessagesUse the Inbox to manage your text messages. TheInbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30messages.Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according tothe most recently received.Your radio supports the following options for textmessages:• Reply• Forward•Delete• Delete AllNote:If the channel type is not a match, you canonly forward, delete, or delete all Receivedmessages.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode254English
Long press   at any time to return to theHome screen.Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages and press   to select.3 or   to Inbox and press   to select.4 or   toview the messages.5Do one of the following:•Press   to select the current message, andpress   again to reply, forward, or deletethat message.•Long press   to return to the Home screen.Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox1Access the Text Message feature.RadioControlsStepsProgram-med TextMessagebuttonPress the programmed Text Mes-sage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Inbox and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.4Press   once more to access the sub-menu.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode255English
5Do one of the following:• or   to Reply and press   to select.• or   to Quick Reply and press   toselect.A blinking cursor appears.6Use your keypad to write/edit your message.7Press   once message is composed.The display shows Sending Message, confirmingyour message is being sent.If the message is sent successfully, a tone soundsand the display shows Message Sent.If the message cannot be sent, a low tone soundsand the display shows Message Send Failed.If the message cannot be sent, the radio returnsyou to the Resend option screen (see ManagingFail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248).Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox1Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Inbox and press   to select.3 or   to the required message and press to select.4Press   once more to access the sub-menu.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode256English
5 or   to Delete and press   to select.6 or   to Yes and press   to select.The display shows Message Deleted, and thescreen returns to the Inbox.Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox1Access the Text Message feature by performingone of the following actions:Radio Con-trolsStepsProgrammedText MessagebuttonPress the programmed TextMessage button.Menu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Messages andpress   to select.2 or   to Inbox and press   to select.When you select Inbox and it contains no textmessages, the display shows List Empty, andsounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page152).3 or   to Delete All and press   toselect.4 or   to Yes and press   to select.The display shows Inbox Cleared.PrivacyIf enabled, this feature helps to preventeavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channelby the use of a software-based scrambling solution.The signaling and user identification portions of atransmission are not scrambled.Your radio must have privacy enabled on the currentchannel selector position to send a privacy-enabledtransmission, although this is not a necessaryrequirement for receiving a transmission. While on aprivacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio isAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode257English
still able to receive clear (unscrambled)transmissions.Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy.To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission,your radio must be programmed to have the sameKey Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as thetransmitting radio.If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of adifferent Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing atall (Enhanced Privacy).If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Homescreen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, exceptwhen the radio is sending or receiving an Emergencycall or alarm.The LED lights up solid green while the radio istransmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio isreceiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission.You can access this feature by performing one of thefollowing actions:• Pressing the programmed Privacy button totoggle privacy on or off.•Using the Radio Menu as described by the stepsdescribed next.Note:Some radio models may not offer this Privacyfeature. Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings or   or   toConnect Plus and press   to select.4 or   to Enhanced Privacy.If the display shows Turn On, press   toenable Privacy. The radio displays a messageconfirming your selection.If the display shows Turn Off, press   todisable Privacy. The radio displays a messageconfirming your selection.If the radio has a privacy type assigned, thesecure or unsecure icon appears on the statusAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode258English
bar, except when the radio is sending or receivingan Emergency Alert.Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) CallToggle privacy on using the programmed privacybutton or by using the menu. Your radio must havethe Privacy feature enabled for the currently selectedchannel position to send a privacy-enabledtransmission. When privacy is enabled for thecurrently selected channel position, all voicetransmissions made by your radio will be scrambled.This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-backduring scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call,and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the sameKey Value and Key ID as your radio will be able tounscramble the transmission.SecurityYou can enable or disable any radio in the system.For example, you might want to disable a stolenradio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enablethat radio, when it is recovered.Note:Performing Radio Disable and Enable islimited to radios with these functions enabled.Check with your dealer or systemadministrator for more information.Radio Disable1Access this feature byRadioControlsStepsRadio Dis-able but-ton1Press the programmed RadioDisable button.2 or   to the required alias orID and press   to select.Radiomenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts andpress   to select. The entriesare alphabetically sorted.3Use one of the steps describednext to select the required sub-scriber alias or ID:Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode259English
RadioControlsSteps• Select the required alias or IDdirectly.• or   to the requiredalias or ID and press to select.•Use the Manual Dial menu• or   to Manual Di‐al and press   to se-lect.• or   to Radio Num‐ber and press   to se-lect.• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number:.The second line of the dis-play shows a blinking cur-RadioControlsStepssor. Use the keypad to en-ter the subscriber alias orID and press  .4 or   to Radio Disableand press   to select.The display shows Radio Disable: <TargetAlias or ID> and the LED blinks green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows Radio Disable Successful.If not successful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Radio Disable Failed.Radio Enable1Access this feature byAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode260English
RadioCon-trolsStepsRadioEnablebutton1Press the programmed Radio Ena-ble button.2 or   to the required alias or IDand press   to select.Radiomenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-phabetically sorted.3Use one of the steps described nextto select the required subscriberalias or ID• Select the required alias or ID di-rectly.RadioCon-trolsSteps• or   to the requiredalias or ID and press   toselect.•Use the Manual Dial menu• or   to Manual Dialand press   to select.• or   to Radio Numberand press   to select.• The first line of the displayshows Radio Number:. Thesecond line of the displayshows a blinking cursor. Usethe keypad to enter the sub-scriber alias or ID and press.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode261English
RadioCon-trolsSteps4 or   to Radio Enable andpress   to select.The display shows Radio Enable: <SubscriberAlias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green.2Wait for acknowledgement.If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds andthe display shows Radio Enable Successful.If not successful, a negative indicator tone soundsand the display shows Radio Enable Failed.Password Lock FeaturesIf enabled, this feature only allows you access yourradio if the correct password is entered uponpowering up.Accessing the Radio from Password1Power up the radio.The radio sounds a continuous tone.2Do one of the following:• Enter your current four-digit password with theradio’s keypad. The display shows  . Press to proceed.• Enter your current four-digit password. Press or   to edit each digit’s numeric value.Each digit changes to  . Press   to move tonext digit. Press   to confirm your selection.You hear a positive indicator tone for every digitentered. Press   to remove each   on thedisplay. The radio sounds a negative indicatortone, if you press   when the line is empty, or ifyou press more than four digits.If the password is correct, the radio proceeds topower up. See Powering Up the Radio on page27.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password. Repeat Step 2.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode262English
After the third incorrect password, the displayshows Wrong Password and then, shows RadioLocked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinksyellow.Note:The radio is unable to receive any call,including emergency calls, in locked state.Turning the Password Lock On or Off1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Passwd Lock and press   toselect.5Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 262.6Press   to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.7If the password entered in the previous step iscorrect, press   to enable/disable passwordlock.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Unlocking the Radio from Locked State1If your radio was powered down after being in thelocked state, power up the radio.A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow.The display shows Radio Locked.2Wait for 15 minutes.Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for lockedstate when you power up.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode263English
3Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 262.Changing the Password1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Passwd Lock and press   toselect.5Enter the four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 262.6Press   to proceed.If the password is incorrect, the display showsWrong Password, and automatically returns to theprevious menu.7If the password entered in the previous step iscorrect,   or   to Change Pwd and press to select.8Enter a new four-digit password.See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Passwordon page 262.9Reenter the previously entered four-digitpassword. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radiofrom Password on page 262.10Press   to proceed.If the reentered password matches the newpassword entered earlier, the display showsPassword Changed.If the reentered password does NOT match thenew password entered earlier, the display showsPasswords Do Not Match.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode264English
The screen automatically returns to the previousmenu.Bluetooth OperationNote:If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-relatedfeatures are disabled and the Bluetooth devicedatabase is erased.This feature allows you to use your radio with aBluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wirelessBluetooth connection. Your radio supports bothMotorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed pathbetween your radio and your Bluetooth-enableddevice.It is not recommended that you leave your radiobehind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device towork with a high degree of reliability when they areseparated.At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tonequality will start to sound “garbled” or “broken”. Tocorrect this problem, simply position your radio andBluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (withinthe 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establishclear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth functionhas a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range.Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneousBluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enableddevices of unique types. For example, a headset, anda PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections withBluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are notsupported.Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full capabilities.Turning Bluetooth On and Off1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to My Status and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode265English
The display shows On and Off. The current statusis indicated by a  .4Do one of the following:• or   to On and press   to select. Thedisplay shows On and a   appears left of theselected status.• or   to Off and press   to select. Thedisplay shows Off and a   appears left of theselected status.Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth DeviceDo not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device orpress   during the finding and connectingoperation as this cancels the operation.1Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and placeit in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.2On your radio, press   to access the menu.3 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.4 or   to Devices and press   to select.5Do one of the following:• or   to the required device and press to select.• or   to Find Devices to locate availabledevices.  or   to the required device andpress   to select.6 or   to Connect and press   to select.Display shows Connecting to <Device>. YourBluetooth-enabled device may require additionalsteps to complete the pairing. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.If successful, the radio display shows<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and   appearsbesides the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon appears on the status bar.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode266English
If unsuccessful, the radio display shows ConnectingFailed.Note:If pin code is required, use the same entrymethod as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio fromPassword on page 262.Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device(Discoverable Mode)Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during thefinding and connecting operation as this may cancelthe operation.1Turn Bluetooth On.See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 141.2 to access the menu.3 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.4 or   to Find Me and press   to select.Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. Thisis called Discoverable Mode.5Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair itwith your radio.Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device’suser manual.Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device1On your radio, press   to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.4 or   to the required device and press to select.5 or   to Disconnect and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode267English
Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>.Your Bluetooth-enabled device may requireadditional steps to disconnect. Refer to respectiveBluetooth-enabled device’s user manual.The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. Apositive indicator tone sounds and   disappearsbeside the connected device. The BluetoothConnected icon disappears on the status bar.Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speakerand Bluetooth DeviceYou can toggle audio routing between internal radiospeaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switchbutton.•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Radio.•A tone sounds and display shows Route Audioto Bluetooth.Viewing Device Details1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.4 or   to the required device and press to select.5 or   to View Details and press   toselect.Editing Device NameYou can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enableddevices.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode268English
4 or   to the required device and press to select.5 or   to Edit Name and press   to select.6Press   to move one space to the left. Press   tomove one space to the right. Press   to deleteany unwanted characters. Long press   tochange text entry method.A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to typethe required zone.7The display shows Device Name Saved.Deleting Device NameYou can remove a disconnected device from the listof Bluetooth-enabled devices.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to Devices and press   to select.4 or   to the required device and press to select.5 or   to Delete and press   to select.The display shows Device Deleted.Bluetooth Mic GainAllows control of the connected Bluetooth-enableddevice’s microphone gain value.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Bluetooth and press   to select.3 or   to BT Mic Gain and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode269English
4 or   to the BT Mic Gain type and the currentvalues.To edit values, press   to select.5 or   to increase or to decrease values andpress   to select.Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable ModeNote:The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Modecan only be enabled via the MOTOTRBOCPS. If enabled, the Bluetooth item will notbe displayed in the Menu and you will not beable to use any Bluetooth programmablebutton features.Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate yourradio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. Itenables dedicated devices to use your radio positionin the process of Bluetooth-based location.Notification ListYour radio has a Notification List that collects all your“unread” events on the channel, such as unread textmessages, missed calls, and call alerts.The Notification icon appears on the status bar whenthe Notification List has one or more events.The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unreadevents. When it is full, the next event automaticallyreplaces the oldest event.Note:After the events are read, they are removedfrom the Notification List.Accessing the Notification List1 to access the menu.2 or   to Notification and press   toselect.3 or   to the required event and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode270English
Long press  to return to the Home Screen.Wi-Fi OperationWi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.Note:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-Fi® network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radiofirmware, codeplug, and resources such as languagepacks and voice announcement.Turning Wi-Fi On or OffNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button isassigned via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi® by performing oneof the following actions.•Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button.Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi orTurning Off Wi-Fi.•Access this feature via the menu.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to WiFi and press   toselect.c) Press   or   to WiFi Status and press to select.Press   to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled.Press   to turn off Wi-Fi. The   disappearsfrom beside Enabled.Connecting to a Network Access PointNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode271English
When you turn on Wi-Fi®, the radio scans andconnects to a network access point.You can also connect to a network access point viathe menu.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to a network access point andpress   to select.5Press   or   to Connect and press   toselect.6Enter the password and press  .When the connection is successful, the radiodisplays a notice and the network access point issaved into the profile list.Refreshing the Network ListNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.•Perform the following actions to refresh thenetwork list.a)Press   to access the menu.b)Press   or   to WiFi and press   toselect.c)Press   or   to Networks and press to select.When you enter the Networks menu, the radioautomatically refreshes the network list.•If you are already in the Networks menu, performthe following action to refresh the network list.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode272English
a)Press   or   to Refresh and press   toselect.The radio refreshes and displays the latestnetwork list.Adding a NetworkNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.If a preferred network is not in the available networklist, perform the following actions to add a network.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to Add Network and press to select.5Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press.6Press   or   to Open and press   to select.7Enter the password and press  .The radio displays   to indicate that thenetwork is successfully saved.Viewing Details of Network Access PointsNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only.Perform the following actions to view details ofnetwork access points.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode273English
3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to a network access point andpress   to select.5Press   or   to View Details and press to select.For a connected network access point, the ServiceSet Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, MediaAccess Control (MAC) address, and InternetProtocol (IP) address are displayed.For a non-connected network access point, theService Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Modeare displayed.Removing Network Access PointsNote:This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR7580e only. Enterprise network access pointsthat are added via CPS can only be removedvia CPS.Perform the following actions to remove networkaccess points from the profile list.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to WiFi and press   to select.3Press   or   to Networks and press   toselect.4Press   or   to the selected network accesspoint and press   to select.5Press   or   to Remove and press   toselect.6Press   or   to Yes and press   to select.The radio displays   to indicate that theselected network access point is successfullyremoved.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode274English
UtilitiesTurning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or OffYou can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) ifneeded.Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button totoggle all tones on or off, or follow the proceduredescribed next to access this feature via the radiomenu.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to All Tones and press   to select.6Press   to enable/disable all tones and alerts.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Turning Keypad Tones On or OffYou can enable and disable keypad tones if needed.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode275English
5 or   to Keypad Tones and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable keypad tones.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset LevelYou can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level ifneeded. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voicevolume.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Vol. Offset and press   toselect.6 or   to the required volume value.The radio sounds a feedback tone with eachcorresponding volume value.7Do one of the following:•Press   to keep the required displayedvolume value.•Press   to exit without changing the currentvolume offset settings.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode276English
Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or OffYou can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone ifneeded.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Talk Permit and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable the Talk PermitTone.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or OffYou can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Toneif needed.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Tones/Alerts and press   toselect.5 or   to Power Up and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode277English
You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable the Power Up AlertTone.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Setting the Power LevelYou can customize your radio’s power setting to highor low for each Connect Plus zone.High enables communication with tower sites inConnect Plus mode located at a considerabledistance from you. Low enables communication withtower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity.Press the programmed Power Level button to toggletransmit power level between high and low. Followthe procedure described next to access this featurevia the radio menu.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to Utilities and press   toselect.3Press   or   to Radio Settings and press to select.4Press   or   to Power and press   toselect.5Press   or   to the required setting and press to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time,long press   to return to the Home screen.Screen returns to the previous menu.Changing the Display ModeYou can change radio’s display mode between Dayor Night, as needed. This affects the color palette ofthe display.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode278English
1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode.Note: or   to change the selected option.5 or   to the required setting and press to enable.   appears besides selected setting.Adjusting the Display BrightnessYou can adjust the display brightness of the radio asneeded.Note:Display brightness cannot be adjusted whenAuto Brightness is enabled.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.5 or   to Brightness and press   toselect.The display shows a progress bar.6Decrease display brightness by pressing   orincrease the display brightness by pressing  .Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode279English
Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press   to confirmyour entry.Setting the Display Backlight TimerYou can set the the radio’s display backlight timer asneeded. The setting also affects the Menu NavigationButtons and keypad backlighting accordingly.Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle thebacklight settings, or follow the procedure describednext to access this feature via the radio menu.The display backlight and keypad backlighting areautomatically turned off if the LED indicator isdisabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off onpage 162).1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.5 or   to Backlight Timer and press   toselect.You can use   or   to change the selectedoption.Turning the Introduction Screen On or OffYou can enable and disable the Introduction Screen ifneeded.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode280English
5 or   to Intro Screen and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Press   to enable/disable the IntroductionScreen.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Locking and Unlocking the KeypadYou can lock your radio’s keypad to avoid inadvertentkey entry.To lock/unlock your radio’s keypad.Option StepsLockingthe Key-pad1 to access the menu.Option Steps2 or   to Utilities andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settingsand press   to select.4 or   to Keypad Lock andpress   to select.You can also use or to change theselected option.Unlockingthe Key-padPress   followed by  .After the keypad is locked, the display showsKeypad Locked and returns to the Home screen.After the keypad is unlocked, the display showsKeypad Unlocked and returns to the Homescreen.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode281English
LanguageYou can set your radio display to be in your requiredlanguage.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Languages and press   to select.You can also use   or   to change selectedoption.5 or   to the required language and press to enable.   appears beside selectedlanguage.Turning the LED Indicator On or OffYou can enable and disable the LED Indicator ifneeded.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to LED Indicator and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5Press   to enable/disable the LED Indicator.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode282English
Identifying Cable TypeYou can select the type of cable your radio uses.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Cable Type and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5The current cable type is indicated by a  .Voice AnnouncementThis feature enables the radio to audibly indicate thecurrent Zone or Channel the user has just assigned,or programmable button press. This audio indicatorcan be customized per customer requirements. Thisis typically useful when the user is in a difficultcondition to read the content shown on the display.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Voice Announcement and press to select.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Voice Announcement.The display shows   beside Enabled.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode283English
•Press   to disable Voice Announcement.The   disappears from beside Enabled.Menu TimerSet the period of time your radio stays in the menubefore it automatically switches to the Home screen.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Display and press   to select.5 or   to Menu Timer and press   toselect.6 or   to the required setting and press to select.Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)This feature controls the your radio's microphone gainautomatically while transmitting on a digital system. Itsuppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to apreset value in order to provide a consistent level ofaudio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.4 or   to Mic AGC-D and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode284English
5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Mic AGC-D. The displayshows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Mic AGC-D. The disappears from beside Enabled.Intelligent AudioYour radio can automatically adjust its audio volumeto overcome background noise in the environment,inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noisesources. This feature is a Receive-only feature anddoes not affect Transmit audio.Note:This feature is not applicable during aBluetooth session.1 to access the menu.RadioCon-trolStepsMenu 1 to access the menu.2 or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings andpress   to select.4 or   to Intelligent Audioand press   to select.Note:You can also use   or   tochange the selected option.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable IntelligentAudio. The display shows   be-side Enabled.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode285English
RadioCon-trolSteps•Press   to disable IntelligentAudio. The   disappears from be-side Enabled.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Intelligent Audio and press to select.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Intelligent Audio. Thedisplay shows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Intelligent Audio. The disappears from beside Enabled.See Authorized Accessories List on page 307 forrecommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessorieswith in-built Automatic Volume Control for similarperformance.Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature Onor OffThis feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedbackin received calls.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to AF Suppressor and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode286English
You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.5Do one of the following.•Press   to enable Acoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The display shows   besideEnabled.•Press   to disable Acoustic FeedbackSuppressor. The   disappears from besideEnabled.Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion ControlFeature On or OffThis feature allows you to enable the radio toautomatically monitor the microphone input andadjust the microphone gain value to avoid audioclipping.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.4 or   to Mic Distortion and press   toselect.5Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The display shows   besideEnabled.•Press   to disable Microphone DynamicDistortion Control. The   disappears frombeside Enabled.Turning GPS/GNSS On or OffGlobal Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is asatellite navigation system that determines the radio’sprecise location. GNSS includes Global PositioningSystem (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite SystemAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode287English
(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System(BDS).Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to togglethe feature on or off.Note:Selected radio models may offer GPS,GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation isconfigured via CPS. Check with your dealer orsystem administrator to determine how yourradio has been programmed.1Press   to access the menu.2Press   or   to Utilities and press   toselect.3Press   or   to Radio Settings and press to select.4Press   or   to GPS and press   to select.5Press   to enable/disable GPS/GNSS.The display shows   beside Enabled.The   disappears from beside Enabled.See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page184 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information.Text Entry ConfigurationYou can configure the following settings for enteringtext on your radio:• Word Predict• Word Correct• Sentence Cap• My WordsYour radio supports the following text entry methods:• Numbers• Symbols• Predictive or Multi-Tap• Language (If programmed)Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode288English
Note:Press   at any time to return to theprevious screen or long press   to return tothe Home Screen. The radio exits the currentscreen once the inactivity timer expires.Word PredictYour radio can learn common word sequences thatyou often enter. It then predicts the next word youmay want to use after you enter the first word of acommon word sequence into the text editor.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to Word Predict and press   toselect.You can also use   or   to change the selectedoption.6Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Word Predict. The displayshows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Word Predict. The disappears from beside Enabled.Sentence CapAutomatically enables capitalization for the first letterin the first word for every new sentence.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode289English
3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to Sentence Cap and press   toselect.6Do one of the following:•Press   to enable Sentence Cap. Thedisplay shows   beside Enabled.•Press   to disable Sentence Cap. The disappears from beside Enabled.Viewing Custom WordsYou can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list tocontain these words.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to List of Words and press   toselect.Display shows the list of custom words.Editing Custom WordYou can edit the custom words saved in your radio.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode290English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to List of Words and press   toselect.Display shows the list of custom words.7 or   to the required word and press   toselect.8 or   to Edit and press   to select.9Use the keypad to edit your custom word.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod. Press   once your custom word iscompleted.The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.Adding Custom WordYou can add your own custom words into your radio’sin-built dictionary.1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode291English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to Add New Word and press   toselect.Display shows the list of custom words.7Use the keypad to edit your custom word.Press   to move one space to the left. Press   orthe   key to move one space to the right.Press the   key to delete any unwantedcharacters. Long press   to change text entrymethod. Press   once your custom word iscompleted.The display shows transitional mini notice, confirmingyour custom word is being saved.If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and thedisplay shows positive mini notice.If the custom word is not saved, a low tone soundsand the display shows negative mini notice.Deleting a Custom WordYou can delete the custom words saved in your radio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode292English
4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to the required word and press   toselect.7 or   to Delete and press   to select.8Choose one of the following.•At Delete Entry?, press   to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious screen.Deleting All Custom WordsYou can delete all custom words from your radio’s in-built.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Settings and press   toselect.4 or   to Text Entry and press   toselect.5 or   to My Words and press   to select.6 or   to Delete All and press   toselect.7Choose one of the following.•At Delete Entry?, press   to select Yes.The display shows Entry Deleted.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode293English
• or   to No and press   to return to theprevious screen.Accessing General Radio InformationYour radio contains information on the following:• Battery• Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)• Radio Model Number Index• Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC• Site Number• Site Info• Radio Alias and ID• Firmware and Codeplug Versions• GPS InformationPress   at any time to return to the previousscreen or long press   to return to the Homescreen. The radio exits the current screen once theinactivity timer expires.Accessing the Battery InformationDisplays information on your radio battery.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Battery Info and press   toselect.The display shows the battery information.For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display readsRecondition Battery if the battery requiresreconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After thereconditioning process, the display then shows thebattery information.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode294English
Checking the Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer)Note:The measurement on the display shows thedegree of tilt at the moment you press   toaccept the Accelerometer option. If youchange the angle of the radio after pressing, the radio does not change themeasurement shown on its display. Itcontinues to display the measurement takenwhen   was pressed.If the portable radio has been enabled for the ManDown Alarms, there is a menu option to check howthe radio measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpfulfeature when the dealer or Radio SystemAdministrator uses the MOTOTRBO Connect PlusOption Board CPS to configure the activation anglethat will trigger the tilt alarm.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the TiltAlarm.5 or   to Accelerometer and press   toselect.The display shows the radio’s angle of tilt(deviation from perpendicular vertical position) indegrees (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, useMOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS toconfigure the Activation Angle for 60 degrees(which is the closest programmable value). TheTilt Alarm timers are triggered when the ActivationAngle is 60 degrees, or greater.Checking the Radio Model Number IndexThis index number identifies your radio’s model-specific hardware. Your radio system administratormay ask for this number when preparing a newOption Board codeplug for your radio.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode295English
1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Model Index and press   toselect.The display shows the Model Number Index.Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTACodeplug FileFollow the instructions below if your radio systemadministrator asks you to view the Option Board OTACodeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). Thismenu option only appears if the Option Boardreceived its last codeplug update OTA.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to OB OTA CPcrc and press   toselect.The display shows some letters and numbers.Communicate this information to your radiosystem administrator exactly as shown.Displaying the Site ID (Site Number)Note:If you are not currently registered at a site, thedisplay shows Not Registered.The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers witha Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radiodoes not generally indicate the Site number. Todisplay the registered Site number, do the following:1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode296English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Site Number and press   toselect.The display shows the Network ID and the SiteNumber.Checking the Site InfoNote:If you are not currently registered at a site, thedisplay shows Not Registered.The Site Info feature provides information that can beuseful to a service technician. It consists of thefollowing information:• Repeater number of current Control Channelrepeater.• RSSI: Last signal strength value measured fromControl Channel repeater.•Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater(five numbers separated by commas).If you are requested to use this feature, please reportthe displayed information exactly as it appears on thescreen.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Site Info and press   to select.The display shows the Site Info.Checking the Radio IDThis feature displays the ID of your radio.Follow the procedure described next to access thisfeature via the radio screen.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode297English
1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to My ID and press   to select.The display shows the radio ID.Checking the Firmware Version and CodeplugVersionDisplays the firmware version on your radio.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Versions and press   to select.The display a list with the following information:• (Radio) Firmware Version• (Radio) Codeplug Version• Option Board Firmware Version• Option Board Frequency Version• Option Board Hardware Version• Option Board Codeplug VersionChecking for UpdatesConnect Plus provides the ability to update certainfiles (Option Board Codeplug, Network FrequencyFile and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air.Note:Check with the dealer or network administratorto determine whether this feature has beenenabled for your radio.Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability toshow its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC,Frequency File version or Option Board firmware fileversion via a menu option. In addition, display radiosthat have been enabled for over-the-air file transfercan display the version of a "pending file". A "pendingAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode298English
file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware filethat the Connect Plus radio knows about via systemmessaging, but the radio has not yet collected all ofthe file’s packets. If a display Connect Plus radio hasa pending file, the menu provides options to:• See the version number of the pending file.• See what percentage of packets has beencollected so far.•Request the Connect Plus radio to resumecollecting file packets.If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-airfile transfer, there may be times when the radioautomatically joins a file transfer without first notifyingthe radio user. While the radio is collecting filepackets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radiodisplays the High Volume Data icon on the HomeScreen status bar.Note:The Connect Plus radio cannot collect filepackets and receive calls at the same time. Ifyou wish to cancel the file transfer, press andrelease the PTT button. This causes the radioto request a call on the selected ContactName, and it will also cancel the file transferfor that radio until the process resumes at alater time.There are several things that can make the filetransfer process start again. The first example appliesto all over-the-air file types. The other examples applyonly to the Network Frequency File and Option BoardFirmware File:• The radio system administrator re-initiates theover-the-air file transfer.• The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires,which causes the Option Board to automaticallyresume the process of collecting packets.•The timer has not yet expired, but the radio userrequests the file transfer to resume via the menuoption.After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading allfile packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquiredfile. For the Network Frequency File, this is anautomatic process and does not require a radio reset.For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is anautomatic process that will cause a brief interruptionto service as the Option Board loads the newcodeplug information and re-acquires a network site.How quickly the radio upgrades to a new OptionBoard firmware file depends on how the radio hasAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode299English
been configured by the dealer or systemadministrator. The radio will either upgradeimmediately after collecting all file packets, or it willwait until the next time that the user turns the radioon.Note:Check with your dealer or systemadministrator to determine how your radio hasbeen programmed.The process of upgrading to a new Option Boardfirmware file takes several seconds, and it requiresthe Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio.Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not beable to make or receive calls until the process iscompleted.Firmware FileFirmware Up to DateNote:If the Option Board firmware file is not Up toDate (and if the radio has partially collected amore recent Option Board firmware fileversion) the radio displays a list with additionaloptions; Version, %Received, and Download.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Updates and press   to select.5 or   to Firmware and press   to select.The display shows Firmware is Up to Date.Pending Firmware – Version1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode300English
3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Updates and press   to select.5 or   to Firmware and press   to select.6 or   to Version and press   to select.If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,the display shows the pending firmware versionnumber.If there is a pending Option Board firmware file,the display shows Firmware is Up to Date.Pending Firmware – % Received1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Updates and press   to select.5 or   to Firmware and press   to select.6 or   to %Received and press   to select.The screen displays the percentage of firmwarefile packets collected so far.Note:When at 100%, the radio needs to bepower cycled Off and then On to initiate thefirmware upgrade.Pending Firmware – DownloadIf the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTAOption Board Firmware File Transfer with a partialfile, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (ifstill ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If youwant the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option BoardFirmware File transfer prior to expiration of thisAdvanced Features in Connect Plus Mode301English
internal timer, use the Download option as describedbelow.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Updates and press   to select.5 or   to Firmware and press   to select.6 or   to Download and press   to select.The display shows the following:Download Available Start DownloadNo Download Availa-bleDownload not availa‐ble7Do one of the following:•Select Yes and press   to start thedownload.•Select No and press   to return to theprevious menu.Frequency FileFrequency File Up to DateNote:If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and ifthe radio has partially collected a more recentfrequency file version) the radio displays a listwith additional options; Version, %Received,and Download.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode302English
3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Frequency and press   to select.The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date.Frequency File Pending – Version1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Updates and press   to select.5 or   to Frequency and press   to select.6 or   to Version and press   to select.If there is a pending Frequency File, the displayshows the pending Frequency File versionnumber.Frequency File Pending – % Received1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Updates and press   to select.5 or   to %Received and press   to select.The screen displays the percentage of frequencyfile packets collected so far.Frequency File Pending – DownloadIf the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTANetwork Frequency File Transfer with a partial file,Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode303English
the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if stillongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you wantthe unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency Filetransfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, usethe Download option as described below.1 to access the menu.2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to Updates and press   to select.5 or   to Frequency and press   to select.6 or   to Download and press   to select.Download CurrentlyUnavailableDownload not avail‐ableDownload CurrentlyAvailableStart Download7Do one of the following:•Select Yes and press to start the download.•Select No and press to return to the previousmenu.Checking the GPS/GNSS InformationDisplays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio,such as values of:• Latitude• Longitude•Altitude• Direction• Velocity• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)• Satellites• Version1 to access the menu.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode304English
2 or   to Utilities and press   to select.3 or   to Radio Info and press   toselect.4 or   to GPS Info and press   to select.5 or   to the required item and press   toselect.The display shows the requested GPS/GNSSinformation.See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 172 fordetails on GPS/GNSS.Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode305English
AccessoriesAccessories306English
Authorized Accessories ListAntennas• UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Whip Antenna(PMAE4068_)[7]• UHF, 403 – 527MHz, Slim Whip Antenna(PMAE4079_)[7]• UHF, 403 – 450MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAE4069_)[7]•UHF, 440 – 490MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAE4070_[7]• UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAE4071_)[7]• UHF, 470 – 527MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAE4071_)[7]• VHF, 144 – 165MHz, Helical Antenna(PMAD4116_)[7]• VHF, 136 – 155MHz, Helical Antenna(PMAD4117_)[7]• VHF, 152 – 174MHz, Helical Antenna(PMAD4118_)[7]• VHF, 136 – 148MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAD4119_)[7]• VHF, 146 – 160MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAD4120_)[7]• VHF, 160 – 174MHz, Stubby Antenna(PMAD4121)[7]• 800/900, 806 – 870MHz, Whip Antenna(PMAF4011_)[8]• 800/900, 896 – 941MHz, Whip Antenna(PMAF4012_)[8]• 800/900, 806 – 870MHz, Short Whip Antenna(PMAF4009_)• 800/900, 896 – 941MHz, Short Whip Antenna(PMAF4010_)Batteries• Core NiMH, 1300 mAh Battery (PMNN4412_)• Core Slim Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Battery(PMNN4406_R)7Applicable to XPR7550 only.8Applicable to XPR7580 only.Authorized Accessories List307English
• IMPRES Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Slim Battery(PMNN4407_R)• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2150 mAh Battery(PMNN4409_R)• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2300 mAh Battery(FM) (NNTN8129_)•IMPRES Li-Ion, 2700 mAh Battery(PMNN4448_R)• IMPRES Li-Ion, 2900 mAh TIA4950 HAZLOC IP68Battery(PMNN4489_)[9]• IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2500 mAh TIA4950Submersible IP57 Battery, Intrinsically Safe(NNTN8560_)• IMPRES Slim Li-Ion, 2100 mAh IP68 Battery(PMNN4491_)• IMPRES Li-Ion, 3000 mAh IP68 Battery, lowvoltage (PMNN4493_)• IMPRES Li-Ion, 3000 mAh IP68 Battery(PMNN4488_)Carry Devices• 2.5-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop(PMLN5610_)• 3-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop(PMLN5611_)• Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed BeltLoop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5838_)•Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Swivel BeltLoop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5840_)• Hard Leather Carry Case with 2.5-Inch Swivel BeltLoop for Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio(PMLN5842_)• Nylon Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt Loop forFull-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio(PMLN5844_)• Belt Clip for 2-Inch Belt Width (PMLN4651_)• Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width (PMLN7008_)• Vibrating Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width(PMLN7296_)Chargers• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger (WPLN4212_)9Applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only.Authorized Accessories List308English
• IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display(WPLN4219_)• IMPRES Single-Unit Charger (WPLN4232_)• Core Single Unit Charger (NNTN8117_)•IMPRES Vehicular Charger (NNTN7616_)• IMPRES Battery Reader (NNTN7392_)Earbuds and Earpieces• Receive-Only Earbud (AARLN4885_)• Receive-Only Earbud (MDRLN4885)• D-Shell Receive-Only Earpiece (PMLN4620_)•Receive-Only Earpiece (RLN4941_)• Standard Earpiece, Black (RLN6279_)• Standard Earpiece, Beige (RLN6280_)• Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Beige(RLN6284_)• Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Black(RLN6285_)• Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Beige (RLN6288_)• Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Black (RLN6289_)• 1-Wire Earbud, 29cm Cord, Black (NNTN8294_)• 1-Wire Earbud,116cm Cord, Black (NNTN8295_)• Over-the-Ear Receiver for Remote SpeakerMicrophone (WADN4190_)• D-Shell Earset (PMLN5096_)• IMPRES Temple Transducer with In-line Push-to-Talk (PMLN5101_)• Replacement Foam Ear Pad and Windscreen(RLN6283_)•Replacement Ear Seal Cloth Cover (1580376E32)• Replacement Boom Mic Windscreen(5080548E02)• Replacement Windscreen O-Ring (3280376E35)• Wireless Earpiece Maintenance Kit (NTN8821_)• Replacement Ear Tips Kit for Wireless Ear Buds(NNTN8316_)• Replacement Ear Tubes for CommPort Earpiece,Pack of 10 (RLN5037_)• Ear Straps for CommPort Earpiece (for SecureAttachment to Ear), Pack of 10 (NTN8988_)Headsets and Headset Accessories• Ultra-Lite Headset (PMLN5102_)• Heavy Duty Noise-Canceling Headset(PMLN5275_)• Lightweight Headset (RMN5058_)Authorized Accessories List309English
• Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-TalkDevice with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable(NNTN8125_)• Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-TalkDevice with Push-to-Talk Audio, 9.5-Inch Cable(NNTN8126_)• Non-Secure Wireless Push-to-Talk Device(NNTN8127_)•Push-to-Talk Module, without Charger(NNTN8191_)• Replacement Earpiece 12–Inch Cable (forNNTN8125_)(NTN2572_)• Business Wireless Accessory Kit (PMLN6463_)Remote Speaker Microphones• Remote Speaker Microphone (PMMN4024_)• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone(PMMN4025_)• Remote Speaker Microphone, Submersible (IP57)(PMMN4040_)•IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, withVolume, IP57 (PMMN4046_)• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, withEarjack, Noise-Canceling (PMMN4050_)• Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement CoilCord Kit (For Use with PMMN4024_ andPMMN4040_) (RLN6074_)• Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement CoilCord Kit (For Use with PMMN4025_,PMMN4046_, PMMN4050_) (RLN6075_)• IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, IP57(NNTN8382_)•IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, withEarjack (NNTN8383_)Surveillance Accessories• Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Black (Single Wire)(PMLN6125_)• Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Beige (Single Wire)(PMLN6126_)• Surveillance Low Noise Kit (RLN5886_)•Surveillance High Noise Kit (RLN5887_)• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Black(PMLN6127_)• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Beige(PMLN6128_)• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (RLN5882_)Authorized Accessories List310English
• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6129_)• IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6130_)• IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Black (PMLN5097_)•IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Beige (PMLN5106_)• IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6123_)• IMPRES 3–Wire Surveillance with Clear,Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6124_)• Transparent Acoustic Tube (RLN6242_)• Replacement Foam Plugs, Pack of 50 (For Usewith RLN5886_) (RLN6281_)• Replacement Ear Tips, Clear, Pack of 50 (For Usewith RLN5887_) (RLN6282_)• Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, RightEar (RLN4760_)• Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,Right Ear (RLN4761_)• Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,Right Ear (RLN4762_)• Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, LeftEar (RLN4763_)• Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits,Left Ear (RLN4764_)• Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, LeftEar (RLN4765_)Miscellaneous Accessories• Universal Chest Pack (HLN6602_)• Waterproof Bag, Includes Large Carry Strap(HLN9985_)• Shoulder Strap (Attaches to D-Ring on CarryCase) (NTN5243_)•Small Clip, Epaulet Strap (RLN4295_)• Break-A-Way Chest Pack (RLN4570_)• Universal RadioPAK and Utility Case (FannyPack) (RLN4815_)• Replacement Strap for RLN4570_ and HLN6602_Chest Packs (1505596Z02)• Universal RadioPAK Extension Belt (4280384F89)• Belt (4200865599)• Tactical Remote Body Push-to-Talk (PMLN6767_)• Push-to-Talk Interface Module (PMLN6827_)• Tactical Remote Ring Push-to-Talk (PMLN6830_)• Tactical Heavy Duty Temple Transducer withNoise Cancelling Boom Microphone (PMLN6833_)Authorized Accessories List311English
Maritime Radio Use in the VHFFrequency RangeSpecial Channel AssignmentsEmergency ChannelIf you are in imminent and grave danger at sea andrequire emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16to send a distress call to nearby vessels and theUnited States Coast Guard. Transmit the followinginformation, in this order:1“MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.”2“THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN__________.” State the name of the vessel indistress 3 times, followed by the call sign or otheridentification of the vessel, stated 3 times.3Repeat “MAYDAY” and the name of the vessel.4“WE ARE LOCATED AT_______________________.” State the positionof the vessel in distress, using any information thatwill help responders to locate you, e.g.:• latitude and longitude• bearing (state whether you are using true ormagnetic north)•distance to a well-known landmark• vessel course, speed or destination5State the nature of the distress.6Specify what kind of assistance you need.7State the number of persons on board and thenumber needing medical attention, if any.8Mention any other information that would behelpful to responders, such as type of vessel,vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc.9“OVER.”10 Wait for a response.11 If you do not receive an immediate response,remain by the radio and repeat the transmission atintervals until you receive a response. Beprepared to follow any instructions given to you.Non-Commercial Call ChannelFor non-commercial transmissions, such as fishingreports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling,or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9.Operating Frequency RequirementsA radio designated for shipboard use must complywith Federal Communications Commission Rule Part80 as follows:Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range312English
• on ships subject to Part II of Title III of theCommunications Act, the radio must be capable ofoperating on the 156.800 MHz frequency.• on ships subject to the Safety Convention, theradio must be capable of operating:• in the simplex mode on the ship stationtransmitting frequencies specified in the156.025 – 157.425 MHz frequency band, and•in the semiduplex mode on the two frequencychannels specified in the table below.Note:Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82,and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the generalpublic in US waters.Additional information about operatingrequirements in the Maritime Services can beobtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80and from the US Coast Guard.Table 1: VHF Marine Channel ListChannel Num-berFrequency (MHz)Transmit Receive1 156.050 160.6502 156.100 160.700* 156.150 160.7504 156.200 160.8005 156.250 160.8506 156.300 –7 156.350 160.9508 156.400 –9 156.450 156.45010 156.500 156.50011 156.550 156.55012 156.600 156.60013** 156.650 156.65014 156.700 156.70015** 156.750 156.75016 156.800 156.80017** 156.850 156.850Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range313English
18 156.900 161.50019 156.950 161.55020 157.000 161.600* 157.050 161.65022 157.100 161.700* 157.150 161.75024 157.200 161.80025 157.250 161.85026 157.300 161.90027 157.350 161.95028 157.400 162.00060 156.025 160.625* 156.075 160.67562 156.125 160.72563 156.175 160.775* 156.225 160.82565 156.275 160.87566 156.325 160.92567** 156.375 156.37568 156.425 156.42569 156.475 156.47571 156.575 156.57572 156.625 –73 156.675 156.67574 156.725 156.72575 *** ***76 *** ***77** 156.875 –78 156.925 161.52579 156.975 161.57580 157.025 161.625* 157.075 161.675* 157.125 161.725* 157.175 161.775Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range314English
84 157.225 161.82585 157.275 161.87586 157.325 161.92587 157.375 161.97588 157.425 162.025Note:* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82,and 83 cannot be lawfully used by thegeneral public in US waters.** Low power (1 W) only.*** Guard band.Note:A – in the Receive column indicates that thechannel is transmit only.Declaration of Compliance for the Use ofDistress and Safety FrequenciesThe radio equipment does not employ a modulationother than the internationally adopted modulation formaritime use when it operates on the distress andsafety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3.Technical Parameters for Interfacing ExternalData SourcesRS232 USB SB9600Input Volt-age (VoltsPeak-to-peak)18V 3.6V 5VMax DataRate28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/sImpedance 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohmMaritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range315English
Batteries and Chargers WarrantyThe Workmanship WarrantyThe workmanship warranty guarantees againstdefects in workmanship under normal use andservice.All MOTOTRBO Batter-ies24 MonthsIMPRES Chargers (Sin-gle-Unit and Multi-Unit,Non-Display)24 MonthsIMPRES Chargers (Multi-Unit with Display)12 MonthsThe Capacity WarrantyThe capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the ratedcapacity for the warranty duration.Nickel Metal-Hydride(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) Batteries12 MonthsIMPRES Batteries, WhenUsed Exclusively withIMPRES Chargers18 MonthsBatteries and Chargers Warranty316English
Limited WarrantyMOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTSI. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FORHOW LONG:MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (“MOTOROLA”)warrants the MOTOROLA manufacturedCommunication Products listed below (“Product”)against defects in material and workmanship undernormal use and service for a period of time from thedate of purchase as scheduled below:XPR Series Digital Porta-ble Radios36 MonthsProduct Accessories (Ex-cluding Batteries andChargers)12 MonthsMOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge eitherrepair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts),replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), orrefund the purchase price of the Product during thewarranty period provided it is returned in accordancewith the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts orboards are warranted for the balance of the originalapplicable warranty period. All replaced parts ofProduct shall become the property of MOTOROLA.This express limited warranty is extended byMOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser onlyand is not assignable or transferable to any otherparty. This is the complete warranty for the Productmanufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLAassumes no obligations or liability for additions ormodifications to this warranty unless made in writingand signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.Unless made in a separate agreement betweenMOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser,MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation,maintenance or service of the Product.MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way forany ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLAwhich is attached to or used in connection with theProduct, or for operation of the Product with anyancillary equipment, and all such equipment isexpressly excluded from this warranty. Because eachsystem which may use the Product is unique,MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, orLimited Warranty317English
operation of the system as a whole under thiswarranty.II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:This warranty sets forth the full extent ofMOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product.Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price,at MOTOROLA’s option, is the exclusive remedy.THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALLOTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THISLIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALLMOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES INEXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THEPRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OFTIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS,LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHERINCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE ORINABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THEFULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BYLAW.III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSIONOR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ONHOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SOTHE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAYNOT APPLY.This warranty gives specific legal rights, and theremay be other rights which may vary from state tostate.IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the dateof purchase and Product item serial number) in orderto receive warranty service and, also, deliver or sendthe Product item, transportation and insuranceprepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLAthrough one of its authorized warranty servicelocations. If you first contact the company which soldyou the Product (e.g., dealer or communicationservice provider), it can facilitate your obtainingwarranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at1-800-927-2744 US/Canada.Limited Warranty318English
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOTCOVER:1Defects or damage resulting from use of theProduct in other than its normal and customarymanner.2Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water,or neglect.3Defects or damage from improper testing,operation, maintenance, installation, alteration,modification, or adjustment.4Breakage or damage to antennas unless causeddirectly by defects in material workmanship.5A Product subjected to unauthorized Productmodifications, disassembles or repairs (including,without limitation, the addition to the Product ofnon-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) whichadversely affect performance of the Product orinterfere with MOTOROLA's normal warrantyinspection and testing of the Product to verify anywarranty claim.6Product which has had the serial number removedor made illegible.7Rechargeable batteries if:• any of the seals on the battery enclosure ofcells are broken or show evidence oftampering.• the damage or defect is caused by charging orusing the battery in equipment or service otherthan the Product for which it is specified.8Freight costs to the repair depot.9A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorizedalteration of the software/firmware in the Product,does not function in accordance withMOTOROLA’s published specifications or the FCCcertification labeling in effect for the Product at thetime the Product was initially distributed fromMOTOROLA.10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Productsurfaces that does not affect the operation of theProduct.11 Normal and customary wear and tear.VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suitbrought against the end user purchaser to the extentthat it is based on a claim that the Product or partsinfringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA willpay those costs and damages finally awarded againstLimited Warranty319English
the end user purchaser in any such suit which areattributable to any such claim, but such defense andpayments are conditioned on the following:1that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly inwriting by such purchaser of any notice of suchclaim,2that MOTOROLA will have sole control of thedefense of such suit and all negotiations for itssettlement or compromise, and3should the Product or parts become, or inMOTOROLA’s opinion be likely to become, thesubject of a claim of infringement of a UnitedStates patent, that such purchaser will permitMOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either toprocure for such purchaser the right to continueusing the Product or parts or to replace or modifythe same so that it becomes non-infringing or togrant such purchaser a credit for the Product orparts as depreciated and accept its return. Thedepreciation will be an equal amount per year overthe lifetime of the Product or parts as establishedby MOTOROLA.MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to anyclaim of patent infringement which is based upon thecombination of the Product or parts furnishedhereunder with software, apparatus or devices notfurnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA haveany liability for the use of ancillary equipment orsoftware not furnished by MOTOROLA which isattached to or used in connection with the Product.The foregoing states the entire liability ofMOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patentsby the Product or any parts thereof.Laws in the United States and other countriespreserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights forcopyrighted MOTOROLA software such as theexclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distributecopies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLAsoftware may be used in only the Product in whichthe software was originally embodied and suchsoftware in such Product may not be replaced,copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used toproduce any derivative thereof. No other useincluding, without limitation, alteration, modification,reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering ofsuch MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights insuch MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license isgranted by implication, estoppel or otherwise underMOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights.Limited Warranty320English
VII. GOVERNING LAW:This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State ofIllinois, U.S.A.Limited Warranty321English
Motorola Solutions, Inc.1303 East Algonquin RoadSchaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A.MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. © 2012–2015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. November 2015www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo*68009502001*68009502001-HC

Navigation menu